UC-NRLF 
 
 [CAX INSTRUCTIONS 
 
 HAIR MOM, 
 
 PES^ALOZZIAN 
 
 INDUCTrVfi SYSTEM; 
 
 TBAOHOfO 
 
 MUSICALi COMPOSITION 
 
 AND THE ART OF 
 
 Extempommj? Interlndes and Volnntaries. 
 A. N JOHNSON. 
 
 BOSTON : 
 
 OLIVER DITSON AND COMPANY, 
 
 277 Washington Street. 
 
 NEW YORK: C. H. DITSON & CO, 
 
 7«« BUOADWAY. 
 
 Entered according to Act of Congress In the year ISM, by O l ; y « b D i t s o If , In the ClttWt Offlcc 
 of the District Court «f &e DUtrict of lAWM^hnMtta. ' * ' 
 


 OLIVER DITSON AND COMPANY, 
 
 277 Washington Street. 
 
 NEW YORK: C. H. DITSON & CO., 
 
 711 Broadway. 
 
 Entered according to Act of Congress in the year 1855, byOtlVERDlTSON, In the Clerk's Offic* 
 of the District Court of the District of Massachusetts. 
 
OLIVER DITSON AND COMPANY, 
 
 277 Washington Street. 
 
 NEW YORK : C. H. DITSON & CO., 
 
 711 Broadway. 
 
 Entered according to Act of Consress in the year 1855, by O I.. I V E R D I T S O N , In the Clerk's Offic« 
 of the District Court of the District of Massachusetts. 
 
PRACTICAL INSTRUCTIONS 
 
 HARMONY, 
 
 VTOV THX 
 
 PESTALOZZIAN 
 
 INDUCTIVE SYSTEM; 
 
 MUSICAI^ COMPOSITION 
 
 AND THE ART OF 
 
 fiitemporizing Interludes and Voluntaries. 
 
 BT 
 
 A. N JOHNSON. 
 
 BOSTON : 
 
 OLIVER DITSON AND COMPANY, 
 
 277 Washington Street. 
 
 NEW YORK: C. H. DITSON & CO., 
 711 Broadway. 
 
 Entered according to Act of Congress in the year 1855, by Olivek Ditson, In the Clerk's Offica 
 of the District Court of the District of Massachusetts. 
 
1 g c r 
 
 PREFACE. VM r, 
 
 This work is designed for the class of persons designated in tha 
 language )f music teachers as " »e«f beginners." It professes to 
 impart a .knowledge of Harmony, not by essays upon the varioua 
 departments, but by exercises which the student is to write, — or so 
 to speak, by a progressive series of problems which the student 
 must solve. The text throughout, has for its sole object the expla- 
 nation of the prhiciples which must be understood in order to write 
 the next succeeding exercise. In many instances, part of a rule or 
 primnple is explained, while the remaining parts, or the exceptions, 
 are not given until long afterwards, for the reason that a knowledge 
 of them is not necessary in order to write the next exercise. The 
 utmost simplicity of language has been used in the explanations, 
 and an attempt made to guard against misapprehension, even oa 
 the part of an undisciplined mind. It is no part of the design of 
 the work to advocate any particular theory, or to take sides on any 
 disputed harmonic point. On those points on which theorists dis- 
 agree, the explanation which at first sight has appeared most plau- 
 sible has been adopted, but no particular investigation of the merits 
 of the different theories has been made, nor is any opinion in refer- 
 ence to them intended to be expressed. With regard to sources of 
 information, the author will merely state that he studied for some 
 time with Xavier Schnyder Von Wartensee. a celebrated theorist 
 in Germany, and has read most works upon Harmony, published 
 in the English and German languages. 
 
 INTERLUDES AND VOLUNTARIES. 
 
 Extemporising interludes and voluntaries, is in reality composing music, conse- 
 quently precisely the same course of study is necessary that is required to learn to 
 write musi(>, — at least, the most thorough method for learning to extemporise well, is 
 to learn to write music well, or in otlier words, to study this book through just as 
 it is. If, however, the student wishes to attend only to those departments of the 
 subject of Harmony which have a direct bearing upon the subject of extempoiising 
 interludes and voluntaries, he can observe the following directions. On page 23 
 two chords only are used, but each measui-e may be said to form a complete interlude. 
 As soon as these two chords are learned, invent other interludes with them, and aj 
 fast as new chords are learned, invent interludes which shall include them. In all 
 places where the direction is given to " compose tunes and pieces," invent interludes 
 and voluntaries instead. As soon as the invention of interludes is commenced, read 
 the remarks on cadences on pages 143 and 205, and always close with a perfiect or a 
 [jlagal cadence. After becommg familiar with major and minor common chords, 
 study chapter XLIII, and introduce passing notes in the invention of Interludes. In 
 all places where the direction is given to examine music, (as on page 106,) examine 
 written iuterludes and voluntaiies instead, noticing the chords and passing notej 
 which comp&se them. 
 
EXPLANATION. 
 
 A knowledge of Hannony, consists in an acquaintance ■with all the chords int<i 
 which the tones of the scale can be combined, and a familiarity with the effect pro* 
 duced by their various progressions. Experience in teaching has proved thAt the 
 most familiar acquaintance with the rules is insufficient to enable the pupil to write 
 coiTCctly or fluently. A course of mental discipline seems necessary to impress 
 the principles of Harmony upon the mind, and impart a familiarity with the effects 
 produced by the diiferent chords and progressions, which is as indispensable to the 
 musical composer as a familiarity with the signification of words is to an author. The 
 course contained in this work is intended to discipline the mind, and impart a knowl- 
 edge of the subject, not by rules and principles to be committed to memory, but by 
 progressive exercises which must be worked out. Before commencing this study, 
 students must be familiar with the Elementary Principles of music. Those who 
 have studied Thorough Base (see pages 207 and 208,) can omit the first nine chap- 
 ters and commence with chapter X. Where it has been necessary to use terms 
 connected with the Elementary principles, the expressions common in the church 
 music books published in Boston and New York have been employed, and the nota- 
 tion taught in them adopted. The paragraphs in large type partake of the nature 
 of rules. These in smaller type are explanations or directions. 
 
 TO TEACHERS. 
 
 The author has had much experience in teaching Harmony, and is confident that 
 this method is easy of explanation, and certain in its results, and that it is impossible 
 for any student to work out the exercises correctly, in accordance with the directions» 
 without acquiring a practical knowledge of the subject. Teachers who are accustomed 
 to use other terms than those employed In this work, may at first be embarrassed by 
 them. The terms employed in all English works are objectionable, scarcely any of 
 them conveying the ideas sought to be conveyed by them. The term "consecutive 
 fifth," for example, conveys a very faint idea of its meaning to a mind ignorant of the 
 subject of harmony. So with most of the other tenns. The plan adopted in 
 this work is to explain the rules and principles in language which unmistakably con- 
 veys the correct meaning, afterwards " relapsing" into the terms most frequently 
 used in other works. 
 
 TO STUDENTS WITHOUT A TEACHER. 
 
 The utmost care must be used not to leave a chapter until it is perfectly understood, 
 nor until every direction in it has been complied with. If this is done, each chapter 
 will be but a small advance upon the previous one. If two or three chapters are 
 imperfectly learned, it will be almost impossible to proceed farther. In the explana- 
 tions it is taken for granted that all that has been explained in prevloiis chapters 
 V remembered. If the student is required to do anything which is not explair rd 
 in the chapter he is studying, it is because it has been explained previously, am ii 
 he has forgotten it, he must review the chapters which he ha' already studied 
 
INSTRUCTIONS IN HARMONY. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 LETTERS COMPOSING THE COMMON CHORDS. 
 
 A Common Chord is composed of three letters, so arranged that 
 he second letter is at the interval of a M//y/, and the third letter at 
 the interval of a^yV//, from the first letter. 
 
 The first (or lowest) letter of a chord is called the Fundamental 
 (or chief) Note. 
 
 Chords are named after the letters which form their fundamental 
 notes ; thus, if A is the fundamental note, the chord is named the 
 chord of A, &.c. 
 
 There are seven common chords, (one being named after each 
 letter in the scale,) viz., the common chord of A, the common choni 
 of B, the common chord of C, the common chord of D, the common 
 chord of E, the common chord of F, and the common chord of G. 
 
 If the fundamental note of a chord is A, what is the name of the chord ? B ? 
 C? D? E? F? G? 
 
 What letters compose the common chord of A ? 
 
 Ans. — A, C, E, because, in the common chord of A, A is the fundamental 
 note, and C and E are the letters which are at the intervals of a third and fifth 
 from A. 
 
 What letters compose the common chord ofB? C? D? E? F? Q? 
 
 CHAPTER H. 
 
 COMMON CHORDS INDICATED BY A FIGURED BASE. 
 
 Give the names of the following common chords. 
 
 c % -J ji> - V ' " ' ' 
 
COMMON CHORDS. 
 
 Th ! first of the fore^^ninf!; chords is the common chord of C. "!t is a common 
 chord bocause it ctmsist> of I luce lettors. the second and third of which are at 
 the intervals of a third and fifth from the fundamental (or lowest _; note. It ia 
 the common chord of C, because C is the fundamental note. 
 
 Chords are freiiueiitly indicated by figures placed under the base. 
 
 In common chords, the base note of each chord is either the fun- 
 damental note, or the third or fifth letter from the fundamental 
 note. 
 
 In common chords, when the base imte is the fundamental note, 
 it is not figured. 
 
 In common chords, when the base note is t!ie third from the fun 
 damental note, it is figured 6. 
 
 In common chords, when the base note is the fifth from the fun- 
 damental note, it is figured ^. 
 
 Name tlie chords indicatc'l by the following base notes. P^ach note has no 
 figure under it, and conse(|uenily each is the fundamental note of a ctnunon 
 chord, i.e., the first indicates the common chord of C, the second the common 
 |/d of E. &c. 
 
 Name the cliords indicated by the f(dlowin2 base notes. Each' note ha.s the 
 figure G under it, ami corisc'((Men{ly each is the third letter above tho funda- 
 mental note, i.e , tlie first in<iicates the coninion chord of .\, the second tlie coti- 
 mon chord of B, &c. 
 
 GG6666()6 666 6 666G6U6U 6 
 
 Nnnie tlie chords indieafed by the following base notes. Each note h;is (he 
 6gures 3 under it. and con.-ciiiiently oacli is the fifth h.-ttcr above tin; ftimhunen- 
 tal note, i e.. the fir>t indicates the coinuion chord of C, the second the comnibn 
 ehord of V, cVc. 
 
 4 4 
 
 A fi 6 f, r. n n b « a r> r, r, r, g q 
 
 44 44 44 44 44 4 4 4 4 4 
 
CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH. 7 
 
 Exercise in naming the following chords until the names are 
 given with fluency. 
 
 d 6 ('• G 6 6 6 
 
 fi G66G6G 6 
 
 4 4 i 
 
 6 6 fi 
 4 
 
 ?r^rf^EEE^EE-5£E:EzEI^EiEE!E?E^:E!£EE 
 
 6G 66 66 6666666 
 4 4 4 4 4 
 
 66 66 66 6 6 <'>5 
 
 4 4 4 4 4 
 
 4 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 LETTERS COMPOSI>fO THE CHOllDS OF THE SEVF.NTH. 
 
 k Chord of ttje Seventh is composed of fonr letters, so arrang- 
 ed that the second letter is at the interval of a l/a.r(/, the third letter 
 at the interval of a//^A, and the fomth letter at the interval of a 
 
8 CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 aevcnth from the fundamental note. In other words, a chord of the 
 seventh is composed of a common chord, with a letter added to it 
 which is at the interval of a seventh from the fundamental note. 
 
 There are seven chords of the seventh, viz., the chord of the 
 seventh of A, the chord of the seventh of B, the chord of the 
 seventh of C, the chord of the seventh of D, the chord of the 
 seventh of E, the chord of the seventh of F, and the chord of the 
 seventh of G. 
 
 "What letters compo?e the chord of the seventh of A ? 
 
 Ans. — A, C, E, G, — because, in the chord of the seventh of A, A is the 
 fundamental note, and C, E and G, are the letters which are at the intervals of 
 third, ffth and seventh from A. Or, in other words, because A, C and E 
 form the common chord of A, and G is the letter which is at the interval of a 
 eeventh from the fundamental note (A). 
 
 What letters compose the chord of the seventh ofB? C? D? E? F? G? 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH INDICATED BY A FIGURED BASE. 
 
 In chords of the seventh, the base note is either the fundamental 
 note, or the third, fifth or seventh letter from the fundamental note. 
 
 In chords of the seventh, when the base note is the fundamental 
 note it is figured 7. 
 
 In chords of the seventh, when the base note is the third from 
 the fundamental note it is figured 0. 
 
 In chords of the seventh, when the base note is the fifth from the 
 fundamental note it is figured ^. 
 
 In chords of the seventh, when the base note is the seventh from 
 the Cmdamental note it is figured ^. 
 
 Name the chords indicated by the following base notes. Each note has the 
 figure 7 under it, and consequently each is the fundamental note of a chord of 
 the seventh, i.e., the first is the chord of the seventh of C, the second the chord 
 of the seventh of A, &;c. 
 
 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 77 7 
 
CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 Natie Je chords indicated by the following base notes. Each note has the 
 Bo'ures I under it, and consequently each is the third letter above the funda* 
 men al note, i.e., the first indicates the chord of the seventh of A, the second 
 the chord of the seventh of D, &c. 
 
 ;?zazf 
 
 R 6 6 6 6 6 
 o o o 5 5 5 
 
 6 6 6 
 5 5 6 5 
 
 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 
 5555555555 
 
 Name the chords indicated by the following base notes. Each note has the 
 figures t under it, and consequently each is the fifth letter above the fundamen- 
 tal note, i.e., the first indicates the chord of the seventh of C, the second the 
 chord of the seventh of E, &c. 
 
 Name the chords indicated by the following base notes. Each note has the 
 figures ^ under it, and copsequently each is the seventh letter above, or (which 
 is the same thing,) the next letter below the fundamental note, i.e., the first in- 
 dicates the chord of the seventh of D, the second the chord of the seventh of 
 B, &e. 
 
 4444 4444 4444 4444 4444 
 3322 2 222 2222 2222 2222 
 
 Exercise in naming the following chords, until it can be done with perfect 
 fluency. 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 7 6 4 4 7 6 
 3 2 3 
 
 4 4 7 6 
 
 a 2 5 
 
 4 4 7 
 
 6 2 
 
 4 4 7 6 4 4 7 
 8 2 5 6 ti 
 
 764 476 447 644 
 
 532 5S2 532 
 
 'mmmmmm^m 
 
 i i 
 
10 COMMON CHORf 9. 
 
 mw^mMmEm 
 
 i i ' I i 
 
 764 4 7544 7fi44 7 
 
 53 2 532 53 2 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 FURTHER REMARKS IN RELATION TO COMMON CHORDS. 
 
 When one or more of the figures 1, 3, 5, 8, are placed under a 
 hase note, the name of the chord is the same that it would be il 
 ihese figures were not expressed. 
 
 Name the chords indicated by the following base notes. Each note has one 
 or more of the figures 1, 3, 5, 8, under it, and, consequently, each indicatea 
 the same chord that it would if no figure was under it, i.e., the first indicates 
 the common chord of A, the second the common chord of C, &;c. 
 
 ^5E?:PEt=EE?ip3^E^f£E*H:iE?:^£l-iEE 
 i i i J ? I ! » ° ' I J ' i I M g U I 
 
 ^, t), or t), when standing alone under a base note, or when 
 placed under or over a figure, indicates that the letter which is at 
 the interval of a third from the base note is i^, \}, or fcj. 
 
 Name the chords indicated by the following base notes, and tell what letter in 
 each is i^, f), or t;. The first base note indicates the common chord of D, with 
 Ffcj. The fifth base note indicates the common chord of B, with D# ; the 5 
 indicates that the chord is the same it would be if no fi^re was under it ; and 
 the i^ indicates that the letter which is at the interval ot a third from the base 
 note is ^ 
 
 gig^igigiiiiip 
 
 # *? b » 4 6 
 
ORIGINAL USE OF FIGURES. 
 
 11 
 
 #, I,, or Iq, when placed at the left hand of a figure, indicates that 
 the letter which is at the interval from the base note denoted by the 
 figure is #, tj, or tj. 
 
 Name the chords iadicated by the following base notes, and tell what letter ia 
 each is #, \^, or K 
 
 e=^. 
 
 m 
 
 #5 
 
 bi 
 
 ^1 
 
 be 
 
 4 
 
 H 
 
 fs bs 
 
 n 
 
 Ans. — The first is the common chord of C, with G#. The second is the 
 common chord of D, with A^j. The third is the chord of the seventh of C, 
 with B^. The fourth is the eooimoa chord of A, with C\). The fifth ia the 
 comm<m chord of C, with Efj. The sixth is the common chord of E, with B^. 
 The seventh is the cominoQ chord of C, with (x\f. The eighth is the eommoa 
 -jhord of D, with 'E^. 
 
 Remark, llic #, }?, or ^, does not alter the meaning of the figures, as pre- 
 viously explained. Thus, #6 means, first, that the base note is the third letter 
 from the fundamental note, (i.e., just what 6 alone means;) second, that the 
 letter which is at the interval of a sixth from the base note is #. 
 
 CHAPTER VT. 
 
 ORIGINAL USE OP FIGURES, 
 
 When figures were first used to indicate chords, three figures were un- 
 doubtedly placed under each base note. The base note was considered as al- 
 ways the fundamental note, and the chord was considered as being composed of 
 the base note, with the letters which formed the intervals from the base not« ex- 
 pressed by the figures. 
 
 lEE^EE^i 
 
 =.=* 
 
 ! i ! 
 
 
2 
 
 CHORDS OF THE NINTH. 
 
 In *}je above example the figures are written as they probably were when the 
 figured base was first invented. It will be seen that the three letters represent- 
 ed upon the treble staff form the intervals from the base which the figures ex- 
 press, i.e , in the first chord the three notes are at the intervals of eighth, 
 third, and fifth from the base note, and in the second chord af the intervals of sixth, 
 eighth, and third from the base note. The first three of the above chords are 
 common chords of A. The last four are chords of the seventh of A. From tho 
 foregoing it will be aeen that — 
 
 6 is now used to indicate the chord formerly indicated by ^ ; « is 
 now used to indicate the chord formerly indicated by ^ ; 7 is now 
 used to indicate the chord formerly indicated by h ; 5 is now used 
 to indicate the chord formerly indicated by 1 ; ^ is now used to in- 
 dicate the chord formerly indicated by | ; ^ is now used to indicate 
 the chord formerly indicated by |. 
 
 Remark. — It is immaterial which figure is uppermost. — | and t mean the 
 ^ame thing, as do also S and §, t and |, &c. 
 
 6 may be considered as an ahbreviatioii for the full figuring | ; % 
 for the full figuring 4 ; 7 for the full figuring 5, <fcc. 
 
 8 3 
 
 The full figuring of chords is sometimes used, instead of the ab- 
 breviations. 
 
 Name the chords indicated by the following base notes. 
 
 fioiiigiPiiiigEK 
 
 6 6 6 
 
 .'^4 5 4 
 8 8 3a 
 
 ^ 
 
 8 8 3 
 
 i I 5 
 
 2 3 3 S 
 6 4 5 7 
 
 4 6 8 5 
 
 Remark. — A part only of the full figuring is sometimes employed, for exana- 
 ple, Sforg (6); J for | (7), &c. 
 
 CHAPTER Vn. 
 
 CHORDS OF THE NINTH. 
 
 A Chord of the Ninth is composed of a common chord, with a 
 etler added to it, which is at the interval of a ninth from the fim- 
 imnuital note. 
 
CHORDS OF THE BLErtNTH. IS 
 
 WLit letters compose the chord of the ninth of A ? 
 
 An3. — A, C, E, B, — because A, C and E form the common chord of A, and 
 B is the letter which is at the interval of a ninth from the fundamental note. 
 
 What letters compose the chord of the ninth of B ? C ? D ? E ? F ? G ? 
 
 In chords of the ninth the base note is usually the fundamental 
 aot<^. It is indicated by the figure 9. 
 
 Name the chords indicated by the following base notes. Each note has the 
 figure 9 und«r it, and eonsec[uently each is the fundamental note of a chord of 
 the ninth, i.e., the first is the chord of the ninth of C, the second is the chord of 
 the ninth of F, &^ 
 
 9d9<)9d999999999Q 
 
 CHAPTER Vm. 
 
 CHORDS OF THE ELEVENTH. 
 
 A Chord of the Eleventh is composed of a common chord with 
 « letter added to it, which is at the interval of an eleventh from the 
 ^.indaraental note. 
 
 What letters compose the chord of the eleventh of A ? 
 
 Ans. — A, C, B, D, — because A, C and E form the common chord of A, 
 and D is the letter which is at the interval of an eleventh from the fundamental 
 note. 
 
 What letters compose the chord of the eleventh of B ? C ? D ? E ? F ? G ? 
 
 In chords of the eleventh, the base note is usually the fundamen- 
 tal note. It is figured 4, or sometimes ^. 
 
 Name the chords indicated by the following base notes. Each note has 4 
 or t under it, and consequently each is the fundamental note of a chord of the 
 eleventh, i.e., the first is the chord of the eleventh of G, the second the chord 
 of the eleventh of B, &c. 
 [2] 
 
14 
 
 DISCORDS. 
 
 ^iiHiifigliipHI 
 
 CHAPTER IX- 
 
 Comnion Chords are called Cfmcords. 
 
 Chords of ihe seventh, chords of the ninth, and chords of th« 
 eleventh, are called discords. 
 
 Discords are formed by adding to the common chord the lettcf 
 which is a seventh, a ninth, or an eleventh, from the fimdamental 
 note. 
 
 Two discords aie sometimes added to the common chord. 
 
 -\- 
 
 —0. — 
 — #1— 
 — #1 — 
 — • — 
 
 Hi 
 
 iEEliiil 
 
 
 1- 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 — # rr 
 
 
 ==;= 
 
 1 — 
 
 E3=l 
 
 
 
 f: 
 
 -Z»_ 
 
 ZZAH 
 
 EE:|t 
 
 7 I ? 
 
 t* 4 4 
 
 7 7 4 
 
 9 4 
 
 In the first of the above examples two discords are added to the common 
 chord, making five parts. In the second example the same chords are givem 
 with one of the letters of the common chord omitted, in order to make but four 
 parts. 
 
 In the first chord of the above examples the letters which are at the intervals 
 of a seventh and an eleventh are added to the common chord, forming a chord 
 with the characteristics of both the chord of the seventh and the chord of the 
 ninth. 
 
 A chord composed of a common chord, witli the lottei-s added to 
 \i which are at the intervals of a seventh and a ninth from the iniir 
 iamental note is called a Chord of the Seventh and Ninth. 
 
 A chord composed of a common chord, with the letters added to 
 
DISCORDS. 
 
 15 
 
 it which are at the intervals of a seventh and an eleventh froia the 
 fi .idamental note, is called a Chord of the Seventh and Eleventh. 
 
 A chord composed of a common chord, with the letters added to 
 it which are at the intervals of a ninth and an eleventh from the 
 fundamental note, is called a Chord of the Ninth and Eleventh. 
 
 When chords containing two discords are used in a four part 
 composition, the letter which is the third of the common chord, or 
 the letter which is the fifth of the common chord, must be omitted. 
 
 In the second part of the foregoing example, the fifth of the first chord, and 
 the third of the second and third chords, is omitted in accordance with this rule. 
 
 Three discords are sometimes added to the common chord. 
 
 In the first chord of the above example, the letters which are at the intervals 
 of a seventh, ninth and eleventh from the fundamental note are added to the 
 common chord, making six parts. 
 
 The second chord is the same, with two of the letters of the common chor^ 
 omitted, to reduce the chord to four parts. 
 
 A chord composed of a common chord, with the letters added to 
 it which are at the intervals of a seventh, a ninth, and an eleventh 
 from the fundamental note, is called a Chord of the Seventh, 
 Ninth, and Eleventh. 
 
 When a chord of the seventh, ninth and eleventh is used in a 
 composition of four parts, the letters which form the third and fifth 
 of the common chord must be omitted. 
 
 Remark. — The chords of the seventh, ninth, and eleventh, are precisely th* 
 «ame when combined that they are when but one of these discords appears in 
 *hord. Exercises upon the two and three discord chords are therefore unnece* 
 
19 INTERVALS. 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 INTERVALS. 
 
 The differeiue in pitch between two letters is called an Interval. 
 From a letter to the next in alphabetical order the interval la 
 called a Second. 
 
 Intervals are always reckoned upwards. 
 
 What letter is at the interval of a second from A ? 
 
 Ans. — B, because it is the next letter in alphabetical order above A. 
 
 What letter is at the interval of a second from B? C? D? E? F? G? 
 
 From a letter to the next but one in alphabetical order the inter- 
 val is called a Third. 
 
 What letter is at the interval of a third from A ? 
 
 Ans. — C, because C is the next letter but one in alphabetical order from A 
 
 What letter is at the interval of a third from B ? C ? D ? EV F ? G ? 
 
 From a letter to the next but two in alphabetical order the interval 
 IS called a Fourth. 
 
 What letter is at the interval of a fourth from A ? B ? C ? D ? E? F ? G ? 
 
 From a letter to the next but three in alphabetical order the in-^ 
 terval is called a Fifth. 
 
 What letter is at the interval of a fifth from A?B?C?D?E?F?G? 
 
 ^'rom a letter to the next but four in alphabetical order the in- 
 terval is called a Sixth. 
 
 What letter is at the interval of a sixth from A? B? C? D? E? F? G? 
 
 From a letter to the next but five in alphabetical order the interval 
 cs called a Seventh. 
 
 What letter is at the interval of a seventh from A? B? CI DT ET FT G« 
 
 Name the intervals in the following example. 
 
V 
 
 A second containing a half step (or semitone,) is called a Minob 
 
 f^COND. 
 
 A second containing a step (or tone.) is called a Major Second. 
 A third containing a step and a half step is called a MiNor 
 Third, 
 A third containing two steps is called a Major Third. 
 A fourth containing two steps and one half step is called a Per- 
 
 rECT F CURT 7^:. 
 
 A fourih containing three steps is called a Superfluous Fourth. 
 
 A fifth contaniing three steps and one half step is called a Per- 
 fETT Fifth. 
 
 A fifth containing two steps and two half steps is called a Di- 
 Mi>'fSHED Fifth. 
 
 A sixth containing four steps and one half step is called a Major 
 .•sixth. 
 
 A sixth containing three steps and two half steps is called a 
 Minor Sixth. 
 
 A seventh containing five steps and one half step is called a 
 Major Seventh. 
 
 A seventh containing four steps and two half steps is called a 
 Minor Seventh. 
 
 Minor Seconds. Major Seconds. Minor Thirds. 
 
 L__|__ ^:^^4^_^_ _ I J 
 
 1 — r 
 
 mmmm 
 
 ^j: 
 
 Perfect Fourths. Superfluous Fourths. Diminished Fifths. Perfect Fifths. 
 
 I 1 1 1 , J I . 1 J I 
 
 1 1 
 
 9 
 
18 
 
 Minor Sixths. 
 
 THE MAjo„ SCALJC. 
 
 Major Sixths. 
 
 Minor Sevenths. 
 
 Major ScTenths. 
 
 * IJ 
 
 \Zil: 
 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 THE MAJOR SCALE. 
 
 A series of seven tones, so arranged that there is the interval of 
 a minor second between the third and fourth tones and intervals ol 
 major seconds between the other tones, is called the Major Scale. 
 
 This scale may commence on any letter, care being taken that 
 the above-named order of intervals is preserved. 
 
 When the scale commences on C, the order of inte rvals is correct. 
 When it commences on any other letter, sharps or flats must be em- 
 ployed to preserve the order of the intervals. 
 
 The scale is said to be in the Key of the letter with which it 
 commences. 
 
 If the scale commences on A, it is said to be in the key of A, i.e., ' key of A' 
 means that A is the first tone of the scale. 
 
 Key of C. 
 
 Key of A. Key of E 
 
 -#-« 
 
 Key of B. 
 
 Key of F^. 
 
 #r^ 
 
 Key of C#. 
 
 ^-^^=^tl'l^=^^& 
 
 •-#— 
 
 ~^^ 
 
THE MAJOR SCALE. 
 
 19 
 
 Key of G#. 
 
 Key of M. 
 
 E*!?«g: 
 
 — a-#- 
 •-* — 
 
 Key of A#. 
 
 
 KeyofE#. 
 
 KeyofBff. 
 
 Key of F. 
 
 fJ^-iH*: 
 
 KeyofBb- 
 
 Key of El?. 
 
 -^-#A ^ #-*- 
 
 Key of A t> 
 
 i«if: 
 
 Key of Db- 
 
 
 Key of Gb- 
 
 )?=t6 
 
 KeyofCb- KeyofFtT. 
 
 Key of Bbb- 
 
 :fc^: 
 
 Key o{ Ebb 
 
 Key of Abb- 
 
 Key of Dbb- 
 
 
 The sharps or flats which are placed at (he commencement o.. 
 each key are said to form the Signature, 
 
20 THE MAJOR SCALE. 
 
 The signature of the key of A is three sharps. The signature of the key <x 
 A4f 15 ten sharps. The signature of the key of C is called natural. Natural, 
 in this case, means simply that no sharps or flats are necessary to preserve the 
 order of the intervals when the scale begins on C, not that it is any more natu- 
 ral to sing or play in the key of C than in any other key. 
 
 What is the sicrnature of the key of A ? A# ? B ? B#? D ? D^ ? E ? Y^ ^ 
 F ? F^ ? G ? G# ? 
 
 What is the signature of the key of Ab? A\)[)l Bb? B^b^ Cb? Db^ 
 
 Dbb? J^b? Ebb? i^^b? Gb? 
 
 What letters form the scale in the key of A ? 
 
 Ans. — A, B, C sharp, D, E, F sharp, G sharp. 
 
 What letters form the scale in the key of A^ ? 
 
 Ans. — A sharp, B sharp, C double sharp, D sharp, E sharp, F double 
 sharp, G double sharp. 
 
 What letters form the scale in the key of B ? B^? C? C^> B? D:?^? E? 
 
 E^? F? F:^.? G? G^? ■ 
 
 What letters form the scale in the key of A b? Abb? ^b? Bbb? Cb? I>b? 
 
 Dbb? Eb? Ebb? Fb? (^b? 
 
 There is a key formed by the use of flats precisely like each key 
 formed by the use of sharps, and a key formed by the use of sharps 
 precisely like each key formed by the use of flats. 
 
 The key of E and the key of Fb are precisely alike, as are also the keys of 
 G and Abb> the keys of Y^rf and Gb, &c. This can be readily proved by 
 playing the scale in these keys on the pianoforte. 
 
 To find the key formed by the use of flats which is the same as 
 one formed by the use of sharps, or vice versa, find the difference 
 oetween the number of sharps or flats in the signature and twelve. 
 
 What key formed by the use of flats is the same as the key of A ? 
 
 Ans. — The signature of the key of A is three sharps. The difference between 
 three and twelve is nine, consequently the key which has the signature of nine 
 flats (Bbb) is the one required. 
 
 What key formed by the use of flats is the same as the key of A4f ? B? C? 
 
 C^-i D> Dtt? E? E#? 1<^> 
 
 What key formed by the use of sharps is the same as the key of Ab? Abb- 
 Bb? Bbb? C.^ Cb? Db? Bbb? Eb? Ebb? I^-' I'b? Gb? 
 
VARIETIES OF COMMON CHORnS. 21 
 
 CHAPTER Xn. 
 
 VARIETIES OF COMMON CHORDS. 
 
 Chords are named from the letters, to denote their abstract or 
 positive pitch. They are also named from nmnerals, to denote 
 their relative pitch. 
 
 If 071C of the scale is the fundamental note of the chord, it is called 
 ihe Chord of One ; if two is the fundamental note, the Chord of 
 Two, &e. 
 
 The chords when named by numerals are usually designated by 
 the Roman figures, I, II, III, IV, Y, VI, VII. 
 
 Common Chords ia the Key of C. 
 
 q==^=— =j===s===2==^— 
 
 I II III IV V VI VII 
 
 Commoa Chords in the Key of G, 
 
 . — g 1*" 
 
 -!=■ 
 
 i II III IV V VI VII 
 
 What letters compose the common chord of I, in the key of D ? 
 
 Ans.— D, F^, A. 
 
 What letters compose the common chord of II, in the key of D ? The chord 
 of III? IV? V? VI? VII? 
 
 Remark. — It will be well for the student to pass through all the keys in thia 
 way, telling what letters compose the common chords of I, II, III, IV, V, VI 
 and VII, in each key. 
 
 A common chord, composed of a fundamental note, a major third 
 and a perfect fifth, is called a Major Common Chord. 
 
 The common chords of I, IV, and V, are major common chorda. 
 
 A common chord composed of a fundamental note, a minor third, 
 and a perfect fifth, is called a Minor Common Chord. 
 
22 VARIETIES OF COMMON CHORDS, 
 
 The common clioids of II, III, and VI, are minor common chords, 
 
 A common chord composed of a fundamental note, a minoi thifd 
 and a diminished fifth, is called a Diminished Common Chord. 
 
 The common chord of VII is a diminished common chord. 
 
 "Write the major common chords in the keys of C, G, D, A, E, B, F^. Gp, 
 Db Ab Eb B'b and F. 
 
 Major Common Chords Major Common Chords 
 
 in the Key of C. in the Key of G. 
 
 Write the minor common chords in the keys of C, G, D, A, E, B, Fff, G\) 
 Db, Ab, Eb, Bb, and F. 
 
 Minor Common Chords Minor Common Chords 
 
 in the Key of C, in the Key of G. 
 
 -A- ,'- 1 jf rr 
 
 II III VI 
 
 Write the diminished common chords in the keys of C, G, D, A, E, B, F^, 
 Gb, Db. Ab, Eb, Bb, and F. 
 
 Diminished Common Chord Diminished Common Chord 
 
 in the Key of C. in the Key of G, • 
 
 m 
 
 Ex feEEF^EEff SEES-Elf^^- 
 
 vii VII 
 
 Remark. — It will be well for the student to practice all the chords in all th( 
 keys upon the pianoforte, first playinp: the major common chords in every key, 
 then the minor common chords, and finally the diminished common choixls, cc^o- 
 tinuing t lo practice until fluency is attained. 
 
BEST POSITIONS Ot' COMMON CHORDS. 
 
 CHAPTER Xni. 
 
 BEST POSITIONS OF COMMON CHORDS. 
 
 A very common progression in all varieties of musi« is for the chords of I and 
 V to follow each other. 
 
 The following are the best positions for this progression. 
 
 Key of C. 
 
 fixERCISE No. 1. 
 
 I=^= 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 3= 
 
 =5- 
 
 =R=I= 
 
 — — 
 
 Ef=;i 
 
 _£=-p- 
 
 — i — 
 
 
 9 
 V 
 
 I 
 
 — 'r 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 i-T ^^— 
 
 r 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 
 -*- 
 
 ._•_ 
 
 — ii_ 
 
 
 
 —\ — 
 
 _S 
 
 Exercise No. 2. 
 
 The same example in the Key of Gr. 
 
 1 1— — l- 
 
 I V I 
 
 
 
 -f- 
 
 Write the above example in the keys of C, G, D, A, E, B, F#, Gb, Db' 
 Ab, Eb, Bb. and F. 
 
 Practice the above example upon the pianoforte, playing it in the keys of C, 
 G, D, A, E, B, F#, Gb, Db, Ab, Eb, Bb, and F, continuing the exercise 
 until fluency is attained. 
 
 Remark — ' Progression' means the manner in which chords move, or follow 
 each other. 
 
 Another common progression is for the ch^ius of I and IV to follow eacb 
 other. 
 
 The following are the best positions for this progression 
 
BEST POSITIONS OV COMMON CHORDS. 
 
 Exercise No. 3. 
 
 I IV I 
 
 --« — F — *^T=* F 
 
 m 
 
 Write the above example in the keys of C, G, D, A, E, B, F#, Gj?, D[>, 
 Ab, Eb, Bb, and F. 
 
 Practice the above example in all the above-named keys, upon the pianoforte, 
 continuing the exercise until fluency is attained. 
 
 The following are the best positions for the progression in which the chord ol 
 II is most commonly introduced. 
 
 Exercise No. 4. 
 
 #- '0- 
 
 m — \0 
 
 mUSi 
 
 ?-^^^ 
 
 11 
 
 Write and practice the above example in the same keys as in the previous 
 examples. 
 
 The following are the best positions for the progression in which the chord of 
 in is most commonly introduced. 
 
 Exercise No. 5. 
 
 ' ' --!H— ' 
 
 
 I III IV 11 V I 
 
 H— 
 
 Write and practice the above example in the same keys as in the previooi 
 •xamplcs. 
 
yORMS. 25 
 
 The ibllowing aie the best positions for the progression in which the chord oi 
 V I is most eomuionly in reduced. 
 
 Exercise No. 6. 
 
 !^in-n'r:ni:^:-n:z+TZ|-^_— 5 
 I V VI II V I ' 
 
 Write and practice the above example in the same keys as in the previous 
 examples. 
 
 Remark. — It is very important that the student should be so familiar with 
 the above examples as to be able to play them from memory in every key at any 
 time ; in short, so familiar with them that they will never be forgotten. 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 When the base note of a chord is the fundamental notCj the chord 
 is said to be in the First Form. 
 
 When the base note of a chord is the third, the chord is said to 
 be in the Second Form. 
 
 Wlien the base note of a chord is the fifth, the chord is said to be 
 a the Third Form. 
 
 Common Chord of C, 
 first form. 
 
 Common Chord of C, 
 second form. 
 
 mmm 
 
 Comninn Chord of C 
 third form. 
 
 [31 
 
id 
 
 When the cliords are designated by the Roman numerals, the fona 
 is usually indicated by a figure placed over the numeral ; thus, I 
 
 o 
 
 danotes the cl ord of one, first form ; I the chord of one, second 
 form, &.C. 
 
 "Write the following chords in the key of C — 
 
 ] '2 3 2 ] 3 
 
 I 111 VI II IV VII I V 
 
 13 3 1 
 Vll IV V VI 
 
 ^ l\ 
 
 2 1 2 3 
 
 VI III Vil I 
 
 2 3 3 
 
 IV 11 III 
 
 Example. 
 
 ESEEPEEI: 
 
 |EE|^e. 
 
 ii^l^i: 
 
 S 
 
 l?==FF&c. 
 
 I 
 
 III. 
 
 3 
 VI. 
 
 [V.' 
 
 Remark. — It is imraaterial in what positions the parts upon the treble staf 
 are written. The design of the exercise is to impart a knowledge of the forms. 
 The chords in the exercise are not designed to have any harmonic connection 
 with each other. 
 
 I Write the above exercise also in the keys of G, D, A, E, B, F#, G[j, I>\), 
 Ab, Eb. I^b. and F. 
 
 Best positions for a progression consisting of the common chords 
 
 i i! f ^' i 
 
 Exercise No. 
 
 ._l_. 
 
 I. 
 
 N±?.=EEizEEE!iE?EcEEEEE?:I:!EcEEiEi?;[l: 
 
 i 11 f ^ 1 
 
 Write the above exercise in all the keys, and then practice it thoroujrhly io 
 ftU th) k»ys upon the piano, until the ability to play it from memory is attained. 
 
27 
 
 Remark. — The keys which have the signatures 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 sharps, 
 being precisely like those which have 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 flats, and the keys 
 which have the signatures 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 flats being precisely like those 
 which have the signatures 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 sharps, it is not customary to use 
 more than six sharps or flats for signatures. When directions are given to write 
 or play an exercise in all the kevs, it will be understood that in all cases th* 
 keys of C, G, D, A, E, B, M Gb, J)\), K\), Eb, Bb, and F, are meant. 
 
 Best positions for a progression consisting of the common chords 
 3 1 1 
 I V I 
 
 1 
 III 
 
 1 
 
 IV 
 
 Exercise No. 2. 
 
 Il.llll 1« » m m * ft i^ 
 
 ^-<'-'d-^-*-#-^-'=[--;rff-;r-r-h-'=F-pp-F-F-F=P-tt 
 
 ^^iszczppzrzfziizpt-rippir^rzfzp: 
 
 Jill 
 
 I III IV II 
 
 3 1 1 
 I V 1 
 
 Write and practice the above exercises in all the keys. 
 
 Best positions for a progression consisting of the common chords 
 
 Exercise No. 3. 
 
 2:— i-izJ- 
 
 =s:=q:=2: 
 
 -m — *- 
 
 — w — 1^ — »- 
 
 ::E!:EEEEEE5^EEEE?EE 
 
 r 
 
 II 
 
 VI II 
 
 i 
 
 "^ 
 
 :f:_#_#- L_f:_^ 
 
 . — » — w — « — r — 1^ — 
 
 m 
 
 iii^^^^i^g^l 
 
 Write ind practice the above exercise in all the keys. 
 
28 FORMS. 
 
 Write and practice the following exercise in all the keys. 
 
 KxBBOIfiB No. 4. 
 
 2 
 
 IV 
 
 -4- -' 
 
 i ^ i iV 
 
 
 n — n — i- — I — I — I — I — I — I — n — i — ir 
 
 2 — «— « — « — 2 — «— « — #1— 2-— • — « — *• 
 
 'x=.z-i,z:!Lzs=z.--. 
 
 m 
 
 w — w — w — ^ — I ^ "■ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 rzz^: 
 
 :|Lgzzgzzezz H-g_rz: _g_r 
 
 i- 
 
 -V-#— » a-T-S— £— S— .»— 5 
 
 -1 — !•— i — I 
 
 iiil^giE^iglNiiEs 
 
 i » • » 2 
 
 ",•— I — f ._ 
 
 — I — I — I — l- 
 
 T — ' — ' — ' — r 
 
 
 rF 
 
 Kemark.— The exercises in this and the previous chapters are progressions 
 (or Buccessions) of common chords which occur very frequently in all kinds o^ 
 
music, ChorJs can succeed each other in an infinite variety of pi i>gressiong, 
 and composers are continually inventing new arrangements. In a treatise on 
 harmony it is only possible to notice the most common successions. If the stu- 
 dent has followed the directions, he is now practically familiar with progressiona 
 of common chords, some of which will be found in every strain of nearly every 
 species of music. It will be noticed that in each of the exercises of this and the 
 previous chapter, that each succession of chords is written in three different po« 
 sitions. These positions are explained in Chapter XVI. 
 
 CHAPTER XV. 
 
 When two parts move the same way, they are said to progress 
 m Similar Motion. 
 
 When one part moves and the other remains stationary, they are 
 said to progress in Oblique Motion. 
 
 When two parts move in different directions, they are said to 
 progress in Contrary Motion. 
 
 Similar Motion. Oblique Motion. Contrary Motioa, 
 
 I 
 
 mm 
 
 T 
 
 Rule I. — Two parts which form perfect fifths i?i a chord, must not 
 form perfect fifths in the next chord^ miless they progress in oblique 
 or contrary motion. 
 
 Remark. — This is commonly called the rule of consecutive fifths. The mean- 
 ing of the rule is, that if two parts (the treble and alto for instance,) form per- 
 fect fifths in a chord, those two parts (i.e., the treble and alto.) must not form 
 perfect fifths in the next chord, if they progress in similar motion. Observe 
 that the rule does not forbid such fifths if made by different parts, (i.e., if the 
 treble and alto form perfect fifths in a chord, it does not forbid the treble and 
 tenor, or the alto and base, (&c.) from forming perfect fifths in thfe next chord,) 
 but only forbids consecutive perfect fifths between the same parts, (i.e., if tha 
 treble and base form perfect fifths in a chord, the treble and base must not form 
 perfect fifths in the next chord ; or if the tenor and alto form perfect fifths in a 
 chord, the tenor and alto must not form perfect fifths in the nest chord, &c., &c.) 
 Observe, also, that the rule forbids such fifths only when the two parts progress 
 in similar motion ; that the prohibition is against perfect fifths only, (not against 
 diminished fifths); and that it does not forbid consecutive fifths between two 
 parts in consecutive chords when the two parts are stationary 
 [3*] 
 
30 
 
 Consecutive perfect fifths between 
 two parts progressing in similar 
 motion. Wrong. 
 
 'm 
 
 Consecutive perfect fifths between 
 two parts progrestiiiig in oblique 
 motion. Rigiit. 
 
 Consecutive perfect fifths between 
 two parts progressing in contrary 
 motion. Right. 
 
 Consecutive perfect fifths between 
 the upper and lower parts in the 
 first chord, and the upper and 
 middle parts in the second chord. 
 Right. 
 
 #1- 
 
 «- 
 
 I 
 
 Conse^ itive perfect fifths betweer 
 two pirts which remain stationary 
 on the same degrees of the scale. 
 Right. 
 
 :~n: 
 
 --F--F- 
 
 Consecutive diminished fifths pro. 
 gressing in similar motion. Right 
 
 
 Remark. — The term " Consecutive Fifths," is always understood to 
 wean consGcuUve perfect fifths, although the word " perfect" is not usually 
 rxpressed. 
 
 Point out the consecutive fifths in the following example. 
 
 Exercise No. 1. 
 
 
 3 4 5 
 
 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1.4 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 
 
 -i-n-i^ 
 
 lii^^iifE^i-^siifi 
 
 Remark. — In all exercises in this work, the highest part will be consi- 
 iered as the treble, the second part as the alto, and the third part at il»« 
 
CLOSE HARMONY. * 31 
 
 In the foregoing example the alto and base form consecutive fifths in tho 
 3d and 4th chords, the tenor and base in the 5th and 6th chords, the treble 
 and tenor in the 7th and 8th chords, the tenor and base ni the 10th and 
 11th chords, the treble and base in the 13th and 14th chords, the treble and 
 alto in the 15th and 16th chords, and the alto and tenor in the I8th and 
 I9th chords. 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 CLOSE HARMOVr. 
 
 When chords are so arranged that all the letters composing the 
 3hord, except the base note, are placed as near the treble as possi- 
 ble, the chord is said to be in Close Harmony. 
 
 mmm 
 
 In the above example, the common chord of C is arranged in close har- 
 mony in three positions; i.e., the letters composing the common chord of G 
 are placed as near the treble as possible. 
 
 When the letter which is the fimdam,ental note is the treble note, 
 the chord is said to be in the First Position. 
 
 When the letter \vhi(*h is the third is the treble note, the chord 
 is said to be in the Second Position, 
 
 W'.en the letter which is Xhe fifth is the treble note, the chord is 
 said to be in the Third Position. 
 
 In the above example, the first chord is the common chord of C, first po. 
 sition — because the treble note is the letter which is the fundamental note 
 The second chord is the common chord of C, second position — because the 
 .reble note is the letter which is the third. The third chord is the common 
 chord of C, third position — because the treble note is the letter which is the 
 5fth 
 
m 
 
 CLOSE HARMONY. 
 
 When chords are arranged in close harmony, each chord must be 
 m the first, second, or third position, unless such an arrangement 
 ei)lates the rules, in which case an irregular position maybe taker.- 
 
 In Exercise No. 6, Chap. XIII, (page 25,) the tliird chord is placed in 
 an irregular position, because a consecutive fifth would have been made, 
 (i.2.. Rule No. I would have been violated,) if it had been in the regular 
 position. In Exercise No. 1, Chap. XIV, (page 2G,) the second chord in 
 the third measure is placed in an irregular position, because if it had been 
 in the regular (third) position, Rule No. 1 would have been violated. 
 
 Point out the chords on the 27th and 28th pages, which are placed in 
 irregular positions to avoid violating Rule No. 1. Some of the chords in 
 those pages are placed in irregular positions to avoid violating other rules. 
 Notice that it is required to point out only those which are so placed to 
 avoid violating Rule No. 1. 
 
 Remark — It w" be well to notice that the P^xercises in Chapters XIII 
 and XIV, are all ^ ranged in three positions, i.e., the first and last chords 
 in the first nieasuz-e of each example, are in the first position ; the first and 
 last chords in the second measure in each example are in the second posi- 
 tion ; and the first and last chords in the last measure in each example are 
 in the third position ; the other chords in each measure being arranged in 
 the best relations to the first and last chords. 
 
 Write the following exercises in close harmony, using regular positions, 
 except where such positions will violate Rule No. 1. 
 
 Remark. — The chords required in the exercises are indicated by the 
 figured base. The student must use the treble part here given, i.e., he has 
 to write only the two parts next below the treble, placing them so as to form 
 a first, second, and third position to each chord, unless such a" position will 
 violate the rule. In all subsequent exercises, if the treble is printed, the 
 Etudent is only required to add the alto and tenor, using always the printed 
 treble for his highest note. 
 
 Exercise No. 
 
 ligg-ipgE^pi^iii 
 
 ^ig=lil 
 
 6 6 
 
CLOSE HARMONY. 
 
 ^ .«_ 
 
 3o 
 
 
 ::f=:^:-=-+- 
 
 s 
 
 ExERcrsE No. 9. 
 
 
 Remark. — In the above exercises the student must carefully avoid conse- 
 «iutive fifths. Care must be taken to notice the progression of each part. 
 
 In tlie Pii-st of the following examples tbe tenor in the first chord is D, 
 nnd it moves to E in the second chord. By so doing it forms consocutive 
 fifths with the base. This consecutive fifth is avoided in the second exam- 
 ple, by causing the tenor (D) in the first chord to move to C in the second 
 cbi fd.- 
 
 mmm 
 
 ^ 1 
 
 mm^^ 
 
J4 CONSECUTIVE OCTAVES. 
 
 CHAPTER XVII. 
 
 CONSECUTIVE OCTAVES. 
 
 The scale may be repeated at a higher or lower pitcli. 
 
 -*. # 
 
 I II III IV V VI VII. I II III IV V VI VII. 
 
 The interval from VII of a scale to I of the scale next above, is a 
 half step (minor second). 
 
 The interval from a letter to a letter of the same name in the 
 next higher scale is called an Octave. 
 
 For example, the interval from C in the lower scale to C in tlie upt>er 
 scale, in the above example, is an octave, as .ire also the intervals from 1) in 
 the lower to D in the* upper scale, from E in the lower to E in the upper 
 Bcale, &.C. 
 
 Rule II. — Tiro jxirls which form octaves in a chord. Tn?is( 7ioi 
 form octaves in the next chord, unless they progress in oblique or con- 
 trary motion. 
 
 Remark. — This is comnionly called the rule of consecutive octaves. All 
 the remarks which have been madi; in reference to consecutive fifths, also 
 apply to consecutive octaves. 
 
 In Exercise No. 1, Chap. XV. (pnge 30,) consecutive octavos occur in 
 the following chords, viz. in tliL- 3d and 1th chords, between the treble and 
 base; in the 5tli and 0th, and t'.c lOth and 11th chords, between the alto 
 and ba.se; and in the 15th and It th, and the 18th and 19th chords, between 
 the treble and tenor. 
 
 In Exercise No G, Chap. XIIT, (page 2.5,) consecutive octave.s are avoided 
 in the second and third chords, by the irregular position of the third chord, i.e., 
 if the third chord had been written in the regular second position, the alto 
 would have moved from G in the second chord to A in the third chord, 
 which would have been in consecutive octaves with the base. 
 
 Point out the chords in the exercises in Chapters XIII and XIV in which 
 consecutive octaves are avoided by irregular positions. 
 
 Write the chords indicated by the figured base in the following exercise^ 
 lakiiig care that Rules I and II are observed. 
 
 Rkmakk.— In he exercises, which the student is required to write, when 
 
CONSECUTIVE OCTAVES. 
 
 35 
 
 ft-ogressions occur like those of which examples were given in Chaptern 
 XIII and XIV, it will be well for him to imitate those examples. 
 
 Exercise No. 1. 
 
 ^=?=^=FFr=fEH 
 
 1 — ' ^^ r ' ' 
 
 ^=«=Ei!E£EE:EEEEBf=tE 
 
 
 6 6 
 
 4 
 
 mmmmm^^. 
 
 :p:p: 
 
 mm mm mi^mm 
 
 6 € 6 6 
 
 Exercise No, 9. 
 
 « S 
 
 :^-*^-t:t 
 
 Si^^^ 
 
 iE»EEfe£rE^:ERFE!EEEEiEEEiE-1^: 
 
 6 e 
 
 6 6 
 
 6 6 
 
 ^« i-l-r 
 
 ?-: 
 
 f^^PS^ 
 
 its: 
 
 1 
 
 m'^^^^m^^s 
 
 6 G 
 
 4 
 
36 MODULATION. 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 MODULATION. 
 
 A tune or piece of music is usually said to be in the key denoted by i J 
 signature; thus, if the signature is one s-harp, the tune is s;iid to be in tlie 
 key of G, &,c. It is veiy seldom the case, however, that all the chords ol 
 a tune are in the same key. Tlie following example, according to the sig- 
 nature, is in tie key of C. A ch)se examination, however, ^hows that only 
 the first and last three measures are in that key. The third chord, if in the 
 key of C, would be the chord of II. The chord of II, however, nuist be a 
 minor common chord. Tliis (^kl) chord is a major common chord, an«l 
 consequently is either the chord of I, IV, or V. A comparison with the 
 chord next to it proves it to be t!ie chord cf V, in the key of G. 
 
 In the above example the 1st chord is the common chord of I, in the key 
 of C. The 2d chord is the common chord of IV, in the key of C. The 3d 
 chord is the common chord of V, in the key of G. The 4th chord is the 
 common chord of I, in the key of G. The oth chord is the common chord 
 of V, in the key of A. 'i'he 6th chord is the con)mon chord of I. in the key 
 of A. The 7th chord is the common chord of VII, in the key of D. The 
 8th chord is the common cliord of I, in the key of D. The Oth chord is 
 the common chord of.VII, in the key of G. The 10th chord is the common 
 chord of I, in the key ofG. The 11th, r2th, 13th, 11th, and loth chords 
 are the chords of Vll, 1, IV, V, and I, in the key of C. 
 
 When chords wliich do not belong in the key indicated by the 
 signature are introduced, the chords are said to modulate, and t!ie 
 progression is called a Modul.ation. 
 
 Rr.MARK. — Tt i.s not ea.«;y to give definite direction.^ by which the student 
 can infallibly determine in what key the modulation !.-». The first requisite 
 is always to determine whether it is a major, minor, or diminished common 
 chord. If it is a major common chord, it is either the cliord of I, IV, or V ; 
 »r if it is a minor common chord, it is cither the chord of II, III, or VI. 
 
MODULATION. 
 
 37 
 
 A con parison with the chords before or after it, will generally determine in 
 what key the chord is. For example, the third chord in the above example 
 is a major common chord, and is consequently either the chord of I in the 
 key of b, the chord of IV in the key of A, or the chord of V in the key ol 
 G. A comparison with the chord after it, renders it easy to determine that 
 It is the chord of V in the key of G. If the chord is a diminished common 
 chord, the key is of course infallibly determined, for if it is a diminished 
 common chord, it is the chord of VII, which will enable the student at once 
 to decide what the key is. For example, the 7th chord in the above example 
 is a diminished common chord, and consequently is the chord of VII. It is 
 the chord of C|r, and C# is VII in the key of D, consequently the 7th and 
 8th chords in the example are in the key of D. The sharps and flats form 
 a tolerably good guide to the key. If F4f is the letter which produces the 
 modulation, it is tolerably certain that it is the key of G, because Fsf is the 
 distinguishing sign of the key of G. If G^ is the letter which produces the 
 modulation, it is tolerably certain that it is the key of A, because Gff (in con- 
 nection with F^ and Cfr) is the distinguishing sign of the key of A. 
 
 A chord is not allowed to stand alone in a key. At least one 
 r*.hord, before or after it, must be in the same key. 
 
 When a chord has modulated to another key, the subsequent 
 chords are always in the same key with the modulating chord, until 
 another modulation takes place. 
 
 17 18 19 
 
 The above example is in the key of F. The 6th chord modulates to the 
 key of C. No other modulation takes place until the 15th chord, conse- 
 quently the 6th, 7th, 8th, 9th, 10th, llth, 12th, 13th and 14th chords are 
 in the key of C 
 
 Write the following exercises, and place over each chord the Roman figure 
 which indicates the chord, i.e., over the first place I, to indicate that it is the 
 chord of one; over the second place IV, to indicate that it is the chord o 
 four ; over the third place V, to indicate that it is the chord of five, (in th< 
 key of G,) &c. 
 
 [4] 
 
B8 
 
 Exercise No. 
 
 MODULATION. 
 
 ?^EE!E!zEPEEFPZ:EEEE^i:PE'l 
 
 »-r-l r+-i-ri-: 
 
 ?^i@ggi@iliiii|i;| 
 
 Exercise No. 2 
 
 /ia*in=n;t^-;ri=pir3f--a_-r,:=^-r-=_=Trrfr;-;| 
 
 \f~?5!=E?£EFzEFEEEzEEE=Eit=pTp:l:pl:I 
 ^EEE^LEE?EE^E!iFE5SpEFEEE5:iEr-E:-EE 
 
 # 6 # 4^ 
 
 Rkmaiik. — In all exercises which arc given for the student t'l write, ifthe 
 tieiie and base are both printed, (as they have been in all the exercises thui» 
 
DISPERSED HARMONY. 
 
 39 
 
 far,) he lia3 only to add the two parts next below the treble Where (as in 
 he followincT exercise,) the base alone is given, the student is to write the 
 'uU chord, (i.e., three parts on the treble stuff,) indicated by the base note. 
 
 Write the chords indicated by the following base notes, carefully avoiding 
 .he vrotation of Rules 1 and 2. 
 
 Exercise No. 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 DISPERSED HARMONY. 
 
 When chords are so arranged that the treble, alto, tenor and base 
 ports, are each at their appropriate pitch, they are said to be in Dis- 
 persed Harmony. 
 
 Remark — Chapters XTIT and XIV gave examples of some of ti.e mosi 
 common progressions of common chords in close harmony. The following 
 are principally the same progressions arranged in dispersed harmony. 
 
 Practice the following exercises upon the pianoforte, in the keys of C, G, 
 D, A, K, B, F^, G[), D\), A\), E[-), B\), and F, continuing the practice 
 until the ability to play them fluently from memory in every key is attained 
 
 Remark — If the student cannot reach the two notes which form the in- 
 terval of a tenth in the first and last chords of each third position, he can 
 play the base note of those chords an octave higher. 
 
 -F- 
 
 mmmm^mmi^ 
 
40 
 
 DISPERSED HARMONY. 
 
 EXEKCISE No. 3. 
 
 (fc=iJ=^3^E?E*EfeE^fFEEEpE?E^i 
 
 ( I IV I V I .0. .0 ^ .M. 
 
 IV I V 
 
 -i — » [- — p~t* 
 
 \ — i — 
 
 i 
 
 -r- 
 
 Ei 
 
 Efe 
 
 *^ 
 
 iiiiiS 
 
 Exercise No. 4. 
 
 4-l-4~i'-T-,— ,•■ 
 
 1 I 
 
 I IV 
 
 --EEEEE='"' 
 
 Exercise No. 5. 
 
 r— •-- L-p- 
 
 1 
 ^ I 
 
 r" 
 
 I — Jzr 
 
 r" 
 
 ~^E^E^E^EteSEPE|EP:fe^ 
 
 12 3 11 
 
 ?EEPE^EE^EfEPpEE^E?Ep';B 
 
 
DISPERSED HARMONY. 
 
 41 
 
 Exercise No. 6 
 
 i I I I ! I J I ' 
 
 —0- 
 
 1 
 III 
 
 1 
 IV 
 
 -£ — ^ — I f — E — I" 
 
 _ P — ?? — # — «- 
 
 
 f— •—! 
 
 ^ 1 1 i r 
 
 ^ 
 
 I^EEEEEE^EIE^EEEEEEEErEEEEEEEZf! 
 
 4 4 
 
 If 
 
 i 
 
 E 
 
 / 
 
 1 
 ( 
 
 XERCISE No. 7. 
 
 F5-i5=2=;f; 
 
 1 2 3 J 1 2 ] 1 
 I II I V VI 11 V I 
 
 6 4 
 
 t-Sz::E=:?=;«: 
 
 iiiili 
 
 4 
 
 
 -i — -1—1 — -p- 
 
 :SEt 
 
 v-:c~.r: 
 
 f- ^ /- ^- f - -5-_E f : 
 "i — r" 
 
 ;r; 
 
 [4«] 
 
12 
 
 CONSECUTiVE UNISONS. 
 
 Revark. — The successions of common chords given in tin preceding ex- 
 ercise, are such as occur most frequently in all kinds of music. They are 
 consid;red the best positions for the four parts, in the three pf)sitions. It is 
 not possible always to retain these positions in musical compositions, but 
 composers generally prefer these when they can he taken without violating 
 the rules. The design of requiring the student to become perfectly familiar 
 with these exircises in all the keys, is, that he may never be at a loss 
 with regard to the most desirable positions in which to arrange thi se 
 chords For example, if he wishes to arrange in dispersed harmony ilie 
 
 ci.nrds III,. IV, the best possible poitions are those in Exercise No. G. II 
 
 he wishes to arrange the chords V, VI, the be*t possible positions are those 
 1 Exerci-e No. 7. If he has practiced the exercises according to the direc- 
 tions, he is already perfectly familiar with all the best positions of these 
 chords. 
 
 CHAPTER XX. 
 
 CONSECUTIVE UNISONS. -LEADING NOTE. 
 
 When two parts sing the same tone they are said to be in Unison. 
 
 Rule III. — Tv:o paj'ts which are innnison u,.th each other in a 
 chord, must not be in tmisoji with each other in tlie next chordo. 
 
 Remark. — This is commonly Ca..'ed the rule o'' consecutive uni'^ons, (oi 
 consecutive primes). All the remarks in relation to consecutive fifths and 
 octaves, also apply to consecutive unisons. 
 
 1 2 3 4 5 G 
 
 10 11 12 13 14 15 
 
 
 ;ir-px=-=p-|=r 
 
 :iE&il^EiE»E-j:|E35-a=^J§_E^ 
 
 Treble. 
 
 I 1 1 1 — H •— « — » 
 
 n — n i"T — ci~i 1 — »■ 
 
 Baae 
 
 i'^': 
 
 mw 
 
 ^^igiiigii^i^ii 
 
LEADING NOTE. 43 
 
 In the Qd chord of the (receding example the tenor and base are in uni- 
 Bon, and these two jj irts ^re also in unison in the 3d chord, consequently 
 the tenor and base form consecutive unisons in the 2d and 3d chords. The 
 treble and alto form consecutive unisons in the Gth and 7lh chords, and the 
 alto and tenor form consecutive unisons in the 9th and 10th chords. 
 
 Remark. — When a part does not ascend or descend, but remains upon 
 (he same degree of the scale, it is not considered as possessing motion, con- 
 sequently in such progressions Rules 1, 2 and 3 cannot be violated. In the 
 11th and 12th ciiords of the foregoing e:;ample the tenor an ii base are in 
 uni.son, but as thb/ remain stationary upon the same degree of the scale, the 
 rule is not violated. 
 
 VII of the scale is called the Leading Note. 
 
 Leading Note Leading Note Leading Note 
 
 in the key of C. in the key of G. in the key of D. 
 
 liifl liiiP piii- 
 
 VII. VII. VII. 
 
 Rule IV. — The part which sings the leading note, in the next 
 chord must si,ng the next tone above the leading note. 
 
 In Exercise No. 3, Chap. XIV, (page 27,) the part which has B in the 
 fourth chord, has C in the fifth chord, to avoid violating this rule. 
 
 Remark. — Some rules are considered of more importance than others. 
 The rule of the leading note is one of the least importance, or, in other 
 words, it is one which may be broken when there is a good reason for violating 
 it. Most composers hold that the rule of consecutive fifths (Ride No. 1,) 
 must never be violated. In Exercise No 2, Chap. XIV, (page 27,) in the 
 
 progression III, IV, either Rule No. 1 or Rule No. 4 must be violated, for 
 
 if the part which has the leading note (B) in the chord of III, should have 
 
 the next note above the leading note (C) in the chord of IV, the treble and 
 base would form consecutive fifths. Rule No. 1 being considered of much 
 more importancf; than Rule No. 4, it is observed, and Rule No. 4 is vio* 
 Jated. 
 
44 DIMINISHED COMMON CHORDS. 
 
 CHAPTER XXI. 
 
 DIMINISHED COMMON CHORDS. 
 
 Chords which produce a pleasant sensation to the ear are callca 
 
 IJONCORDS. 
 
 Chords which produce an unpleasant sensation to the ear are 
 called Discords. 
 
 Major and minor common chords are concords. 
 Diminished common chords are discords. 
 
 Remark. — The term " Discord, ' as it is used in harmony, has two signi- 
 fications, sometimes applying to the whole chord, (signifying that the effec 
 produced by the chord is unpleasant,) and sometimes applying to the single 
 part of the chord which produces the unpleat-ant effect. For example, the 
 diminished common chord is called a discord, because the sound produced 
 when that chord is played or sung, is unpleasant. It is the tone which forms 
 the interval of a diminished fifth from the fundamental note, however, which 
 jiroduces the unpleasant effect, consequently this tone is called /Ac discord. 
 That this is the tone which produces tho unpleasantness, may be readily 
 seen, by substituting for the tone which forms a diminished fifth with the 
 fundamental note, one which forms a perfect fifth. The unpleasant sensation 
 will disappear, and the chord will become a concord, (a minor common 
 chord). 
 
 Rules relating to the progression of discords, apply to the single 
 part of the chord which produces the discordant eftect, and not to 
 the entije chord. 
 
 The tone which produces the discordant effect is allowed to move 
 only one degree. 
 
 There are three varieties of discords. 
 
 Discords of the first class produce only a slightly unpleasant 
 effect. In discords of this class the tone which produces the discor- 
 dant effect is allowed to ascend or descend. 
 
 Discords of the second class produce a harsher effect than those 
 of the first class. In discords of this class, the tone Avliich })roduccs 
 the discordant effect is allowed only to descend. 
 
 Discords of the third class jjroduce a very harsh eflcct. In dis- 
 cords of this class, the tone which produces the discordant effect 
 requires a preparation, and is allowed only to descend. 
 
DIMINISHED COMMON CHORDS. 45 
 
 Remakk — The expression, " the tone is allowed to move, &.C.," strictly 
 Bpeaking, is incorrect, inasmuch as a tone cannot move. It is an expression, 
 however, commonly used in harmony, for brevity's sake. The meaning is, 
 that "that part (base, treble, &c.,) which sings the tone which produces 
 the discordant effect, must move, &c." In other words, " the part which 
 has the tone which produces the discordant effect, in the next chord must 
 have the tone next above or below it," (as the case may be). It is also 
 common to say, " tlie fifth mu.-t move so and so," "the seventh must mcive 
 so and so, &c." These expressions are literally incorrect, but they will 
 nevertheless be used in this work for the sake of brevity. It will therefore 
 be understood that the expression " the fifth must move," &.c., &c., means 
 " that the part which sings the tone which forms the interval of a fifth from 
 the fundamental note of a chord, must move," &c., &,c. In other words, 
 tlie part which has the tone which forms the interval of a fifth (&c.) from 
 the fundamental note of a chord, must in the next chord have the tone next 
 above or below that tone. 
 
 Rule V. — The diminished fifth must move but one degree^ ascend- 
 in <i or dei>ce}iding. 
 
 The diminished fifth is a discord of the first class. It produces but a 
 sligiuly harsh or unpleasant effect, and is therefore allowed to ascend or 
 descend. Discords of the second and third classes are allowed only to descend. 
 The meaning of Rule V is, that that part which sings the tone which forms 
 the interval of a diminished fifth from the fundamental note, in the next 
 chord must sing the tone next above or next below it. 
 
 The exercises in the previous chapters have contained only major and 
 minor common chords, i.e., only the chords of I, II, III, IV, V, and AT, 
 have been employed. It will now be necessary to become familiar with the 
 most common progressions of the chord of VII. This is a diminished con. 
 mon chord, and contains a diminished fifth. As its fundamental note is the 
 leading note, the progression of this chord is much circumscribed, for its 
 fundamental note can only ascend according to the Rule of the leadincr note, 
 ( Rule 4.) and its fifth can only ascend or descend according to the Rule o( 
 the diminished fifth, (Rule 5.) 
 
 Practice the following exercises (except those printed in small rotes,) 
 in all the keys. 
 
 Exercise No. 1. 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 VII. I 
 
 J:^=i 
 
46 
 
 DIMINISHED COM-MON CHORDS. 
 
 FiXXBCiss No. 2. 
 
 111 
 
 VII. I. 
 
 
 M^=Ef 
 
 s 
 
 VII. I. 
 
 ii=i 
 
 Exercise No. 3. 
 
 pil 
 
 VII. 
 
 t==,SEElEJ=S=E^EE[f 
 
 ExExlCISE No. 4 
 
 :t=b 
 
 VII. . I. 
 
 i 
 
 i^=iliL^Ei^EE=fPiHil 
 
 |^]XEIICISE No. 5. 
 
 (* 
 
 -H- 
 
 — « — 
 
 VII. I. 
 
 iiiiiii, 
 
 Miiliiiiilli 
 
 [iEjEEE3 
 
 VII 
 
 ^iprs 
 
DIMINISHED COMMON CHORDS. 
 
 47 
 
 JKEMAUK. — It will be readily seen that in all discords the motioi Df one or 
 more of the parts is circumscribed. The number oppositions, (regular knd 
 ir;egular,) in which chords may be arranged is very great, but each common 
 chord h-is but three forms. In the foregoing exercises, examples are given 
 of each form of tlie chord of VII, going to each form of the chord of I, 
 
 miking in all nine progressions, viz., (1) the chord of VII, going to the 
 
 ch ird of I , (2) the chord of Vll, going to the chord of I ; (3) the chord 
 
 3 1 1 
 
 of VII, going to the chord of I ; (4) the chord of VII, going to the chord 
 
 2 2 2 ^ 
 
 of I , (5; the chord of VII, going to the chord of I ; (6) the chord of VII, 
 
 2 1 3 
 
 going to the chord of I ; (7) the chord of VII, going to the chord of I ; (8) 
 
 2 3 3 . 
 
 the chord of A'll, going to the chord of I ; (9) the chord of VII, going to 
 
 3 
 the chord of I. 
 
 The following is a tabular view of these nine progressions : — 
 
 1 
 VII 
 
 
 VII 
 
 2 
 
 i 
 
 1 1 
 
 VII 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 VII 
 
 
 1 ^ 
 1 VII 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 vli 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 3 
 VII 
 
 
 A 
 
 i 
 
 1 3 
 VII 
 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 Two positions of each of the foregoing progressions are given in the exer- 
 cises on pages 45 and 46. Although many more positions are possible, if 
 the student practices these two thoroughly in every key, he will make him- 
 pelf familiar with the best positions for the progression VII, I. The pro- 
 gression VII I, in these exercises is printed in small notes, because it can- 
 not be made without violating Rule 5, as in this progression the diminished 
 fifth (which is the base note) would be compelled to descend four degrees, 
 
 .12 
 whi.e the rule requires it should descend only one. The progression Vil I 
 is printed in small notes, because it cannot be made without violating Rule 
 4, as in this proo;ression the leading note would be compelled to ascend four 
 decrrees, while the rule requires it should ascend but one. The progression 
 
 1 3 
 VII i is printed in small notes, because it cannot be made without violating 
 
 Rule \. 
 
 3 
 VII 
 
 Remark. — The progression Vll 1, in the exercises', is printed in 
 small notes, because although not strictly in violation of rule, it is consi- 
 dered best that the diminished fifth should descend when it is in the base, 
 
48 THIRD FORMS. DIMINISHED FIFTHS. 
 
 The natural progression of all discords is downwards, and although the 
 diminished fifth is allowed also to ascend, in consideration of the fact that it 
 produces hut a slightly discord.^nt effect, it is not deemed advisahle that it 
 should avail itself of this lihc.cy when it is the base note. 
 
 Remark — Discords are allowed to move but one degree. When it is 
 aid that a discord may ascend or descend, the meaning is always that it 
 may ascend or descend one degree only. The term " discords are allowed 
 to move, «Sic.,'' is a term common in harmony, although, strictly, incorrect. 
 It means, " the Dart which produces the discordant effect may move, &c." 
 
 CHAPTER XXn. 
 
 THIRD FORMS. DIMINISHED FIFTHS. 
 
 Common chords are composed of three letters. In four part com- 
 positions one of the letters must be repeated, or doubled, (either in 
 octaves or in unison). 
 
 In most cases it is not material which letter is doitl'cd, but in 
 some, the one which must be doubled is prescribed by rule. 
 
 RuleYI. — When the common chord of I is in the third form, the 
 fifth of the chord must be doubled, and the parts which have the fiin- 
 damcntal note and tltird must descend one degree. 
 
 liilpliiiiil 
 
 8 1 3 1 
 
 I V I V 
 
 3 . 
 
 In the first measure of the above example, the chord of I is written in 
 close harmony. G is the fifth, and there are two Gs in the chord, one in 
 the base and one in the alto. The treble part is the fiindamental note, and 
 in moving to the next chord it descends one degree; the tenor i» the third, 
 
 and it descends one degree. In the second measure the chord of I is writ- 
 teji in dispersed harmony. The tenor is the fundamental note, and it 
 descends one degree; the treble is the third, and it descends one degree; 
 the base and \lto are both the fifth, which is. therefore, doubled 
 
THIRD FORMS. DIMINISHED FIFTHS. 49 
 
 Remauk. — A common chord in the first form produces a pleasanter (or 
 more concordant) effect than the same chord in either the second or third 
 •orms. A common cliord in the second form produces a le.^s concordant 
 k ffect than the same chord would produce in the first form, and some liber- 
 ties are allowed to the second forms of common chords which are not 
 allowed to the same chords in i\ie first and third forms. A. common chord 
 in the third form produces a much less concordant effect than is produced by 
 the same chord in iha Jirst fonri, and is also less concordant than the same 
 chord in the second form, so much so, that by some authors a common cliord 
 in the third form is considered a discord. These remarks apply to the effect 
 produced by a chord when played alone, by itself, and not to effects pro- 
 duced by the progression of chords. Although Rule 6 applies to the third 
 form of the chord oi one, careful composers apply it to the third forms of all 
 the common chords ; and it is recommended to the i^tudent, in writing the 
 exercises in this work, to observe the rule in reference to the third form ol 
 all the clifirds, unless the construction of the exercise renders its observance 
 impossible. 
 
 Wkeii a part ascends or descends one degree in obedience to a 
 rule, it is said to Resolve. 
 
 When a chord is repeated, or when the tone requiring a resohition 
 is repeated in a different chord, the resolution is not required to take 
 place until a chord is taken which does not contain the tone requir- 
 ma: a resolution. 
 
 In the first measure in the above example, the first chord contains a lead 
 iug note and a diminished fifth, both of which, according to Rules 4 and 5, 
 require a resolution. Neither resolves, however, because the second chord 
 ss a repetition of the first, in a different postion, and both leading note and 
 diminished fifth appear in it again. The third chord. does not contain either 
 the leading note or diminished fifth, so in passing from the second to the 
 third cliords, they both resolve according to the rules. In the second mea- 
 sure the leading note appears in the first chord, in the chord of V, and again 
 in the second chord, in the chord of III. It is not, therefore, required to 
 resolve in passing from the first to the second chords. It does not appear in 
 the third chord, so in passing from the second to the third chord it r( solves 
 according to the rule. 
 
 [5] 
 
50 
 
 THIRD FORMS. DIMINISHED FIFTHS. 
 
 Exercise H^o. 
 
 ! ! ^ 1 
 
 I ! ^ I J f ^ 
 
 1 2 1 
 
 VI II V 
 
 ?=Rr: 
 
 
 6 6 
 
 1 ! ! ^ 
 
 I 5 ^ ^ J ! ^ >^l fl ^r 
 
 •E-^E^'E-E=E§^E-Eg?E"E=^F 
 
 3 # 
 
 6 « # # 
 
 ^ 1 ! I 1 1 1 V I li fi n ! ^ 1 
 
 :jE*EiEEEE!E'EEEEEEEEEcEE 
 
 fi 6 b b •; 
 
 4 4 4- 
 
 Write the chords indicated by the foregoing base notes, in close harmony. 
 It will be noticed that the 5th, Gth, 7th and 8th measures are in the key ot 
 G, all the others being in the key of C. In this and all other exercises 
 which tlie student is required to write, he should endeavour to place the 
 chords in such positions that when played the exercise will sound well. For 
 example — 
 
 -E^EjE3EfflEM=rg=fE:FpB=E 
 
 
 &C 
 
 In writing the above exercise, carefully observe all the rules, particularljr 
 Rule 6. After writing the exercise in close harmony, write it also in din- 
 persed harmony. 
 
 Rule VII. — A jjcrfect fifth must not follo7v a d'wiinished fifth, in 
 iiinilar mntioHy unless the chord containing the perfect fifth is in ttu 
 second form. 
 
THE MINOB SCALE. 51 
 
 In the foregoing rule, one of the expressions commonly used in harmony 
 for the sake of brevity, is employed. It means that if in a chord two parts 
 form diminished fifths with each other, the same two parts must not form 
 |)erfect fifths with each other in the next chord, if they progress in similar 
 motion, unless the chord which contains the perfect fifth is in the second 
 form. It will be seen that this is a kind of consecutive fifths, somewhat dif- 
 ferent from those prohibited by Rule No. 1. Observe that this rule does 
 not forbid a diminished fifth from following a perfect fifth, nor a diminished 
 fifth from following a diminished fifth. 
 
 Wrong, Right Right. Right, 
 
 In each chord in the above example, the treble and tenor form fifths with 
 each other. In the first measure a perfect fifth follows a diminished fifth, 
 but it is wrong, because the chord which contains the perfect fifth is not in 
 the second form. In the second measure, a perfect fifth follows a diminished 
 fifth, and it is right, because the chord which contains the perfect fifth ia 
 in the second form. In the third measure a diminished fifth follows a perfect 
 fifth, and, in the fourth measure, a diminished fifth follows a diminished 
 fifth, neither of which progressions are forbidden. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII. 
 
 THE MINOR SCALE. 
 
 A second a half step greater than a major second is called a 
 Superfluous Second. 
 
 A third a half step smaller than a minor third is called a Dimin- 
 ished Third. 
 
 A fourth a half step smaller than a perfect fourth is called a Di- 
 minished Fourth. 
 
 A fifth a half step larger than a perfect fifth is called a Super- 
 fluous Fifth. 
 
 A sixth a half step larger than a msyor sixth is called a Supeb" 
 rLUOus Sixth. 
 
52 
 
 THE MINOR SCALE. 
 
 A seventh. a half Step smaller than a minor serenth is called a 
 Diminished Seventh. 
 
 A series of seven tones, so arranged that the interval from the 
 first to the second tone is a major second, from the second to the 
 third a minor second, from the third to the fourth a major second, 
 from the fourth to the fifth a major second, from the fifth to the 
 sixth a minor second, and from the sixth to the seventh a super- 
 fluous second, is called the Minor Scale. 
 
 Remark. — It is customary to express the word " minor," when speaking 
 of a minrir key, (thus, key of C minor, key of G minor, &,c. ;) but it is not 
 usual to express the word " major" when speaking of a major key. The term 
 "key of C," &c , is understood to mean the " key of C major," &.C., 
 although the word '* major" is not ex{ 
 
 Kay of A minor. Key of E minor. Key of B minor. 
 
 
 Key of F?r minor. 
 
 Key of C4r minor. 
 
 Key of A^ minor. 
 
 Key of E^ minor. 
 
 Key of B# minor. Key of Fx minor. 
 
/ THE MINOR SCALE. 53 
 
 Key cf CX minor. Key of Gx minor. 
 
 Key of D minor. 
 
 -•-^*-^5 
 
 Key of G minor. 
 
 Key of C minor. 
 
 Key of F minor. 
 
 
 Key of Bb minor. Key of Ef? minor. 
 
 Fb:5Tzz= 
 
 
 -^*- 
 
 Key of At) minor. Key of Df? minor. 
 
 '^'^^=^^^^E??: 
 
 Key of G[? minor. 
 
 Key of Ct> minor. 
 
 
 -^-»^!5#- 
 
 Key of Ft) minor. Key of B^b minor. 
 
 [5] 
 
64 THE MINOR SCALE. 
 
 What is the sifriiafure of the key of A minor? A flat minor? A shar| 
 minor? B minor ? Bflatniinor? B double flat minor ? B sharp minor 
 C minor ' C flat minor Y C sliarp minor? C double sharp minor? B 
 minor? D flat minor? D sharp minor? E minor? E flat minor? E 
 sharp minor? F minor ? F flat minor ? F sharp minor? F double sharp 
 minor? G minor? G flat minor V G sharp minor? G double sharp 
 minor ? 
 
 What key formed by the ust; of flats is the same as the key of A niinor? 
 Csee page iiO ) B minor? Brf minor? C^ minor? CX mmor;' D# minor? 
 E minor? Efr minor? F:fr minor? Fx niinor? G:fr niinor' Gx niinor? 
 
 W^liat key formed by the use of sharps is the same aa the key of A minor? 
 A [j minor? Bj) minor? Bl;|? minor? C minor? C() minor? D minor? 
 })\) niinor? E,\) mim r? F minor? F\) minor? G minor? G[) miiu^r? 
 
 Double flats are always represented by two single flats placed 
 together (bb). 
 
 Double sharps are sometimes represented by two single sharps 
 placed together {^^), and sometimes by a cross (x), it is immaterial 
 which. 
 
 VII of the minor scale must always be a half step higher than 
 the signature makes it. 
 
 Sharps, flats and naturals, when placed before the notes, arc 
 called Accidentals, to distinguish them from sharps and fiats in the 
 signature. 
 
 In the foregoing examples of the niinor scales it will be noticed that Vil 
 is always raised, by an accidental, a half step higher than the signature would 
 make it. This is done in the keys of D minor, G minor, A minor, E niinor, 
 B minor, F^ minor, and Cfr minor, by placing an accidental sharp (t=) before 
 it; in the keys of Gr!^ niinor, D:fr minor, A^ niinor. Eff minor, an<l Bff 
 minor, by placing a double sliarp (X) before it ; and in the key of GX minor, 
 by placing a tri|)le sharp (^X) before it. In the key of C minor, F minor. 
 B\) minor, El) minor, A|) minor, D\) minor, and Gf) iifinor, V[L is made a 
 half step higher than the sii;nature would make it, by placing an accidental 
 natural {^) before it, (thus removing the flat in the signature), and in the 
 keys of C[) minor, F[) minor, and B(;(; niinor, by removing tliL' double flul 
 of the signature (t^b), and substituting a single flat in its place. 
 
 The character wliich rej)resents a sharp (?*) always deuotes a 
 tone a half step higher than would be represented by the note 
 before which it is placed, if that note was in the key of C, with ito 
 accidental before it. 
 
 The character which represents a flat ([)) always denotes :i toiw 
 a half step lower than would be represented by the note before 
 
THE MINOR SCALE. 
 
 BB 
 
 which it is placvjd, if that note was in the key of C, with no acci- 
 iental before it. 
 
 •The character which represents a double sharp (i^^ or x) alwayi 
 lenotes a tone a whole step higher than would be represented by 
 he note before which it is placed, if that note was in the key of C, 
 ivith no accidental before it. 
 
 The character which represents a double flat (bb) always denotes 
 a tone a whole step lower than would be represented by the note 
 before which it is placed, if that note was in the key cf C, with no 
 accidental before it. 
 
 The character which represents a triple sharp (:f^x) always denotes 
 a tone ^ step and a half higher than would be represented by 
 the note before which it is placed, if that note was in the key of 
 C, with no accidental before it. 
 
 The character which represents a triple flat (bbb) always denotes 
 a tone a step and a half lower than would be represented by the 
 note before which it is placed, if that note was in the key of C, 
 with no accidental before it. 
 
 Ttie character which is called a natural (b), when it stands alone 
 before a note, always denotes the tone which would be represented 
 by the note before which it is placed, if that note was in the key 
 of C, with no accidental before it. When the character is placed in 
 connection with a sharp or flat (Iq^ or ^b) it denotes that a single 
 sharp or flat is substituted for a double sharp or a double flat. 
 
 In the above Example, the fourth note is C sharp. It would have been C 
 sharp if the accidental was not there ; and as the sharp simply denotes a tone 
 a half step higher than would be represented by the note before which 
 It is placed if that note was in the key of C, ivithout cm accidental before it, 
 the presence of the accidental does not affect its pitch. Tn other words, in 
 this case the accidental is entirely unnecessary. The last note in the exam- 
 pie is F shar,-. It would have been F double sharp according to the signa 
 ure, but the •' ^.ff " indicate that a single sharp is substituted for a doubl 
 sharp. 
 
 What letters form the scale in the key of A minor? A flat minor? A 
 sharp minor ? B minor? B flat minor? B double flat minor? B sharp 
 minor? C minor? C flat minor.' C sharp minor? C double sharp minor? 
 D minoj ? D flat minor? D sharp minor ? E minor ? E flat minor ? 1 
 
56 COMMON cuonns in the minor key. 
 
 pharp minor? F minor ? F flat minor? F sharp minor? F double sharp 
 minor? G minor? G flat minor? G sharp minor? G double sharp 
 ininor ? 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV. 
 
 COMMON CHORDS IN THE MINOR KEY. 
 
 Like the major scale, (as explained on page 34,) the minor scale 
 may be repeated at a higher or lower pitch. 
 
 ===-===ET=EE=E« 
 
 v:n 
 
 r 
 
 :^ -w 'f' IV V VI VII I 11 III IV V VI VII 
 
 The interval from VII of the minor scale to I of the scale next 
 above is a minor second. 
 
 Common Chords of the Minor Scale. 
 
 i ■*■ ;f/ iv^ V VI VII 
 
 II III 
 
 The common chords of I and IV are composed of a fundamental 
 note, a minor third, and a perfect fifth, and are consequently Minor 
 Common Chords. [See page 21.] 
 
 The common chords of II and VII are composed of a funda- 
 mental note, a minor third, and a diminished fifth, and ai-e conse- 
 quently Diminished Common Chords. [See page 22.] 
 
 The common chord of III is composed of a fundamental note, 
 1 major third, and a superfluous fifth, and is called a Supehfluous 
 Common Chord. 
 
 The common chords of V and VI are composed of a fundamen- 
 tal note, a major third, and a perfect fifth, and are consequently 
 Major Common Chords. [See page 21.] 
 
 What kind of a chord is I of the minor scale ? 
 Ans. — A minor common chord. 
 
PROGKESSIJ-VS IN THE MINOR MODE. Ol 
 
 What kind of a chord is IE of the minor scale? Ill ? IV ? V ? VI ? 
 VII ? 
 
 What chords of the minor scale are major common chords? 
 Ans — The common ciiords of V and VI 
 
 What chords of the minor scale are minor common chords? Diminished 
 common chords? SuperHuous common chords'? 
 
 What chords of the major scale are major common chords ? [See page 
 21] Minor common chords V Diminished common chords? 
 
 What chords of the major and minor scales are major common chords? 
 
 Ans.— The common chords of i , IV and V, of the major scale ; and V 
 and VI of the minor scale. 
 
 What chords of the major and minor scales are minor common chords? 
 Diminished common chords? Superfluous common chords? 
 
 CHAPTER XXV. 
 
 PROGRESSIONS IN THE MINOR MODE. 
 
 " Minor Mode" and " Minor Key" are terms used to denote 
 
 music composed from the tones of the mhior scale. " Major 
 
 Mode" and "Major Key" denote music composed from the tones 
 of the major scale. 
 
 Note The following are progressions which are constantly occurring 
 in minor music. The student should transpose each of them to the follow- 
 in<T keys, viz ;— E minor, B minor, F< minor, C* minor, G^ imnor, D^ 
 mmor, D minor, G muior, C minor, F minor, B|i minor, and E[) minor; 
 ^nd practice them thoroughly upon the piano, until he is able to play thein 
 readily from memory. It will be noticed that the last five exercises are re- 
 petitious, in dispersed harmony, of the first five. 
 
 No I. 
 
 ; — &- 
 
 '-'~ji~'- 
 
 
 m 
 
 ^- 
 
 
 
 _Jl^S- 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 4h- 
 
 
 
 :_•_ 
 :-l=- 
 
 -4 
 
 e'; 
 
 IgliiEiili 
 
£8 
 
 PROGRESSIONS IN THE MINOR SCALE. 
 
 No. 2. 
 
 izi=n-:|:rn'— : 
 - — « 2— — « --*— • — 
 
 A- 1 
 
 SB: 
 
 
 No. 3. 
 
 1 1 1 
 
 I IV V I 
 
 g — ,1 1 g~r» — I 1 9 -ra — i 1 — * tl- 
 
 ^E4£Ep:'Ei=j=f3EsE|EJEi:fF 
 
 
 I 
 
 No. 5. 
 
 :^^zs^^ - 
 
 ■^»- 
 
 ' pj: 
 
 «--•( 
 
 I \^ VI fi I / 
 
 r 
 
 iz«~rz:[z::rzT:z:*i«i3=z;[3.!zzri:*i«i:r=:i="-^:i:^a!iLr 
 
PROGRESSIONS IN THE MINOR MODE. 
 
 5i 
 
 No 6. 
 
 } 'y 1 
 
 ^1 L 
 
 « «__L_L. 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 No. 7. 
 
 1 
 
 mmmm 
 
 IV 
 
 ■-^ — * — ^-T-F — » 
 :zsziizzz:ziszii»iz~ 
 
 I 
 
 No. 8. 
 
 iiiUPp'iiiii^giiri 
 
 -• — i- 
 
 £EPE:S-:^iE£ 
 
 ;g 
 
 
 ?^:£-p- 
 
 — »- 
 
 pi 
 
 No. 9. 
 
 ffi-^- 
 
 
 
 
 I I 
 
 iS- 
 
 ft ? I 1 
 
 ■=F^S-F 
 
 P=E^"? 
 
 
 -^ « 
 
 P 
 
6) 
 
 HIDDEN FIFTHS AND OCTATES. 
 
 No. 10. 
 
 - ST —i- -J- -•'- -•- J I . I 
 
 i I V-. n 
 
 I '. 
 
 
 Note. — The above are the best positions of some of the most common 
 progressions in minor music. If the student has followed the directions, 
 he is now perfectly familiar with them. In future exercises where these 
 chords are employed, the positions which are given in the exercises of this 
 chapter should always be employed except in passages where the rules would 
 be violated by so doing. [See " Remark " at the close of page 28.] 
 
 CHAPTER XXVI. 
 
 HIDDEN FIFTHS AND OCTAVES. 
 
 Rule VIII. — Tu-o jjarts must not move to a perfect fifth., octave 
 prime, in similar motion^ except (Is/) ichen the vpper part does not 
 skip ; (2nd) v:Iien the chord containing the perfect fifth, octave or 
 prime, is in the second forni, [see page 49 ;] and {3d) icJien the upper 
 of the two parts in the first chords ajid the lower of the two parts i?i 
 the secojid chord, form a small sevoith. 
 
 Remark. — This is called the Rule of Hidden Fifths, Octaves and Primt^ 
 
 or Unisons). An unpleasant effect is produced by jirogressions in which 
 
 these hidden fifths, liidden octavos, and hidden primes, occur, which by many 
 
 is supposed to be occasioned by the ear involuntarily supplying the interuie- 
 
 Jiate ones in the progression. 
 
 
 fzz^zzi,=-^=.±z,t^^j:^t 
 
HIDDEN FIFTHS AND OCTAVES. 
 
 61 
 
 In t le first, measure of the above example, it will be seen, tliat if, in the 
 progression represented by tlie lar^e notes, the intervening tones (represent- 
 ed by the small notes,) were supplied, consecutive fifths would be made by 
 the last three notes in each part. In the second measure consecutive oc- 
 taves would be made by the last two notes ; and in the third measure conse- 
 cutive primes would be made by the last two notes in each part. 
 
 J^xamples of two parts moving to a perfect fifth in similar mo- 
 tion, which are right ; or, in other words, examples of progression 
 m which hidden fifths occnr, which are correct. 
 
 Example No 
 
 Example No. 9. 
 
 
 EiEEEE 
 
 In each measure of the treble staff in the above examples, it will be seen 
 that if the intervening tones were supplied, consecutive fifths would be made, 
 i. e., hidden fifths are produced by these progressions. In Example No. 1, 
 the upper part does not skip, consequently, according to Rule VIII the pro- 
 gression is correct, notwithstanding the hidden fifths which are produced 
 by it. In Example No. 2, the chord which contains the perfect fifth is in 
 the second form, which is one of the exceptions allowed by the rule, conse- 
 quently this progression is correct. In Example No. 3, the two parts which 
 produce the hidden fifths are the treble and alto. In the first measure, the 
 upper of these two parts in the first chord is F, and the lower of these two 
 parts in the second chord is G, and G and F fi)rm the interval of a minor 
 seventh. In the second measure, the upper of these two parts, in the first 
 chord, is C, and the lower of these two parts, in the second chord, is D, 
 and D and C form the interval of a minor seventh. The hidden fifths pro- 
 duced in Example No. 3, consequently, come within the third exception 
 stated in the Rule, and are therefore correct. 
 
G2 THK COMMON CHORD OF II IN' THE MINOR MODE. 
 
 In tlie preceding example hidden fifths occur in each measure of the tre t>Ie 
 stafl', and all are inc'irrect. In the first and ^^eeond measures the upper 
 part skips, consequently these measures do not come within the first excep- 
 tion to the rule. In the third and fourth measures, the chords containing 
 the perfect fifth are not in the second firm, consequently they do not come 
 within the second exception to the rule. In the fifth and sixth measures, 
 the upper of the two parts, (which occasions the hidden fif h,) in the first 
 chord, and the lower of the two parts in the second chord, form a major 
 seventh, consequently they do not fall within the third exception to the 
 rule. 
 
 In Exercise No. 5, page 24. the chord of F in the second measure is ar- 
 ranged with both the alto and tenor on A, because, if the tenor had been on 
 F, forbidden hidden fifths would have been made. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVn. 
 
 THE COMMON CHORD OF II IN THE MINOR MODE. 
 
 The ori."'; diminished common chord in the major mode is the chord ot 
 VII. In the minor mode the chords of II and VII are diminished common 
 chords. In the chords of VII, in both modes, the fundamental note is the 
 leading note, and must consequently ascend one degree. In the chord of 
 II, in the minor mode, the fundamental note is not the leading note, and it 
 is therefc»re at liberty to move up or down, or by skips; on this account, al- 
 though it is the same kind of a chord as VII, its resolution is quite different. 
 The object of this chapter is to make the student familiar with the progres- 
 sions which can, and with the progressions which cannot be made, with 
 the common chord of II in the minor mode. 
 
 A tone which has a fixed resohition may move a minor second 
 or a major second, but must not move a superfluous second. 
 
 It will be noticed that the diminished fifth in the chord of II cannot 
 ascend without moving a superfluous second, consequently in the chord d 
 II it cannot ascend or descend as in the chord of VII, but can only descend. 
 
 The chord of 11 can resolve to the chords of I, IV, V and VI. To fa- 
 miliarise the student with every possible progression of this chord, sucfj 
 tables as are described on page 47, are made use of and one example of 
 each progression is given. 'J'he student should invent at lea.^t two or three 
 more examples of each. For instance, one example of the j)rogressioii 
 h ? is given, but many more in these forms are possible, and the studeii 
 should write at least two or three more of thorn; and so with u i, ff i. and 
 all the otliers 
 
THE COMMON CHORD OF II IN THE MINOR MODE. 
 
 63 
 
 1 1 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 , 
 
 3 
 
 II I 
 
 " 
 
 ' 
 
 II 
 
 I 
 
 O J^ 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 II I 
 
 II 
 
 I 
 
 11 
 
 I 
 
 3 1 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 8 
 
 3 
 
 II I 
 
 " 
 
 I 
 
 II 
 
 I 
 
 
 ;3E3: 
 
 1 3 
 
 II I 
 
 :n'==n'= 
 
 
 2 1 
 
 II I 
 
 _l L 
 
 
 II 
 
 ? r 
 
 w 
 
 Cannot be done, be- 
 CHiise the filth can- 
 not resolve. 
 
 -r 
 
 Cannot be done, be- 
 cause the fifth can- 
 not resolve. 
 
 ?- 
 
 ] 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 II 
 
 V 
 
 II 
 
 V 
 
 II 
 
 V 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 II 
 
 V 
 
 II 
 
 V 
 
 II 
 
 V 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 II 
 
 V 
 
 " 
 
 V 
 
 II 
 
 V 
 
64 
 
 THE COMMON CHORD OF II IN THE MINOR MODE. 
 
 1 
 II 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 V 
 
 i 
 
 — ! 
 — m- 
 
 1 2 
 
 II V 
 
 1 1 
 
 I 3 
 
 II V 
 
 1 1 
 
 2 1 
 
 II V 
 
 1 1 
 
 2 2 
 
 II V 
 
 ■ 1 ■ ■ 1 
 
 --i 1 
 
 --m i — 
 
 1 
 1 '" 
 
 — « •P 
 
 - » — -«^ 
 
 
 Cannot be done, be- 
 cause the filth can- 
 not resolve. 
 
 Cannot be done, be- 
 cause the fifth can- 
 not resolve. 
 
 When, after a diminished common chord, a chord is used which 
 does not contain a tone to which the diminished fifth can resolve, 
 it (the diminished fifth) is free. 
 
 When a tone is compelled by the rules to move in a particulai 
 manner, it is said to have a Fixed Resolution. Tones which art 
 not compelled to move in a particular manner, are said to be Free, 
 
 The chords of IV and VI do not contain the tone Co which the dimin- 
 ished fifth can resolve, consequently when the chord of II is followed by the 
 chords of IV or VI, the diminished fifth is free to move up,, down, or by 
 skips. It is desirnble, however, to let it remain stationary if possible, i. e., 
 to let the part which sings the tone which is the diminished fifth in the chord 
 of II, sing the same tone in the next chord. For example, in the first 
 ♦•neasure on page 65 the alto has the tone which is the diminished fifth, 
 (F,) in the chord of II, and has the same tone (F) in the next chord. 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 II 
 
 IV 
 
 II 
 
 IV 
 
 II 
 
 IV 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 II 
 
 IV 
 
 II 
 
 IV 
 
 11 
 
 IV 
 
 Ti 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 II 
 
 IV 
 
 II 
 
 IV 
 
 " 
 
 IV 
 
THE COMMON CHORD OF II IN THE MINOR MODE. 
 
 I 2 
 
 II IV 
 
 m 
 
 I 
 
 :=f~' 
 
 I 3 
 
 II IV 
 
 II IV 
 
 -\—)»——'<0- 
 
 n IV 
 
 1 
 II 
 
 VI 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 VI 
 
 1 
 II 
 
 3 
 VI 
 
 2 
 II 
 
 1 
 VI 
 
 2 
 II 
 
 2 
 VI 
 
 2 
 
 II 
 
 3 
 VI 
 
 3 
 
 II 
 
 1 
 
 VI 
 
 3 
 
 VI 
 
 3 
 II 
 
 3 
 VI 
 
 
 0> 
 
 r-^- 
 
 ^— ^ 
 
 
 o 
 
 ii 
 
 2 
 VI 
 
 ! 
 
 ) 
 
 _ i_ 
 
 =1^:: 
 
 — «- 
 
 -#- 
 
 -? 
 
 — 1#— 
 -h- 
 
 =^= 
 
 -1--:=5=; 
 
 [6«] 
 
C5 
 
 THE COMMON CHORD OF 11 IN THE MINOR MODE. 
 
 When the chord of IT is followed by the chord of VII the di- 
 minished fifth is free. 
 
 The remark has already been made, that when there is no tone in the 
 next chord to which the diminished fifth can resolve, it is free, and the fore- 
 going remark is but a repetition of the same statement. It seems necessary, 
 however, to make the remark in the last named form, because in the pr<v 
 gression from the chord of II to the chord of VII the diminished fifth 
 sometimes ascends a superfluous second, a progression which is allowed in 
 the progression from the chord of II to the chord of VII, but is forbidden in 
 every other progression. 
 
 Write two or three examples of each progression contained in the follow* 
 ing table, and resolve each chord of VII to the chord of I, as in the exam* 
 plea - 
 
 , 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 2 1 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 II 
 
 VII 
 
 II 
 
 VII 
 
 11 
 
 VII 
 
 2 
 
 1 I 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 II 
 
 v,r| 
 
 II 
 
 VII 
 
 II 
 
 VII 
 
 3 
 
 . 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 11 
 
 v„ 
 
 II 
 
 VII 
 
 II 
 
 VII 
 
 11 12 13 
 
 II VII I II VII I II VII I 
 
 • —H.—^.T* »-»—•- 
 
 
 2 1 2 2 
 
 II VII I II vn I 
 
 i"*3Ei5ts: 
 
 
 m 
 — I — » 
 
 :p=s:-zf 
 
 km 
 
 m—0 —a- :i — I - -1 
 
 '!=S*=«R 
 
 • ?eId 
 
PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 67 
 
 CHAPTER XXVin. 
 
 PRACTICAL EXERCISES, 
 
 Write in close harmony the chords indicated by the following base notes, 
 'Aoosing «ach positions as will make the best sounding progressions, or, ia 
 jther words, make as good a tune with these chords as possible. 
 
 Practical Exercise No. 1, 
 
 ^SS^SEiillS 
 
 In all the practical exercises, write under each base note the Roman 
 figures indicating the «hord. For example, in the above exercise, under the 
 first base note writi* I, under the second write V, «fec. 
 
 Remark. — ^The practical exercises are designed to put in practice all the 
 Student has learned previous to the introduction of each exercise. They 
 ehodtt be written with the utmost care, and to be sure that all faults ar« 
 avoideJ, it will be well carefully to examine the chords after they are writ 
 ten, and arswer the following questions in reference to eac! : — 
 
S8 
 
 PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 ^hicb 
 
 re 
 
 1. Is it the right chord? (i. e , the one which the base indicates.) 
 
 2. Is it the right form of the chord? 
 
 3. Is the oliord complete? (i. e., does it contain tbo three letters i 
 are required to form a common chord ?) 
 
 4. is there a leading note in the chord t and, if so, is it rightly 
 solved V 
 
 5. Is 'j rightly used 1 [See page 48.] 
 
 (). Are consecutive fifths, octaves and primes avoided? 
 
 7. Is the diminished fifth rightly used? 
 
 8. Are there no prohibited hidden fifths, octaves or primes ? 
 
 Alter writing the chords in Practical Exercise No. 1, as above directed, 
 write the same chords again with the following notes for the upper part (or 
 melody). 
 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. I . 
 
 glEUisilliiliElpl 
 
 
 "^ 
 
 
 
 After this has been done, write the exercise again in dispersed harmony. 
 
 As there will be many of these practical exercises to be written, it is very 
 important the student should understand clearly how they are to be done, 
 and to guard against misapprehension, Practical Exercise No. 1 is written 
 out in the following examples, just as the student must write every practical 
 exercise. 
 
 Practical Exercise No. I, with the student's own melody. 
 
 irili|;liifii|?ilill|lii 
 
 I V VI II V I IV V I V I VI IV V IV 
 
 liil-Eiiiiiiiiliililiiei 
 
 ^V I IV U V VI IV VII V in I VI IV II V I 
 
PRACTICAL EXERC ISES. 
 
 69 
 
 Practical Exercise No. 1. Given Melody. 
 
 ;5:fc£Ep|Ej±p 
 
 
 l^ilplipig^Piil 
 
 
 ^|I:|i5:E5-S:l:SzfI:iz5: 
 
 ■pi— 
 
 II V VI IV VII V III I VI IV II V 
 
 Practical Exercise No, 1 in Dispersed Harmony. 
 
 I I I I r , III 
 
 ■d-^-cil 
 
 E:EEf£E?E[SE^E=yjE=EEEEErEFFtEp! 
 
 J j i J J 1 . I I • . 
 
 t-^^'-r4-i-r-!~n-r-l^-F-'^T^'^'T-i'-^'T»'^-F^F:FI- 
 
 Whether the Practical Exercises are written in close or dispersed harmo- 
 ny, the four tones which compose each chord are to be considered as treble, 
 aito, tenor, and base, as really as if wri'ten upon four staves. It will be 
 leen that the student is to write each Practical Exercise three times. First, 
 
70 PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 IS at A, making his own choice of positions, i. e., making whichever tone 
 uppermost he pleases ; or, in other words, choosing his own melody. This 
 arrangement of each exercise will hereafter be called " Umn Melody." 
 Second, as at B. In this arrangement the author's arrangement of the pu- 
 Bitions of the chords is taken, i. e., the author's melody is adopted. This 
 arrangement of each exercise will hereafter be called "Given Melody." 
 Third, as at C Here the chords are in the same positions as at |S, but 
 are arranged in Dispersed Harmony. 
 
 Remark. — At /\ the treble s'afFis to be supposed to be occupied with the 
 chords :is arranged by the student Under both the Own Melody and the 
 Given Melody, the student is to write the Roman figures indicating th' name 
 of the chord, as in the Examples A and B. It will be noticed that tlie 
 eighth and ninth chords are in the key of G, the t.-nth, el.venth. &c.. in the 
 key of A minor, &-c If the student finds any ditficulty in placing the Rn- 
 man figures under the chords, he should thoroughly review Chapter XV ill. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No 2 with Own Melody, carefully placing the 
 Roman figures under each chord. 
 
 Practical Exercise No 3. 
 
 After writing and carefully examining the above exorcise by the questioua 
 on page 68, write it again with the Given Melody. 
 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 2. 
 
 L- 1 — ' •-, — '^ — ' I ' ( — ^ -'-j — 1 — ' ' » -*- 
 
 After writing and carefully examining the exercise as written with Given 
 Milody, write it again in Dispersed Harmony. 
 
 Remark. — Tt will be seen that in Example C the base is sometimes taken 
 fcn octave lower than it is in Examples \ ;uid It. In arranging the Disi>er*- 
 
COMMON' CHORD OF 111 IN THE MINOR MODE. 71 
 
 ed Harmony the student will sometimes find it necessary to place the base 
 an «)ctave lower, and will perhaps occasionally be obliged to vary from the 
 Given Melody, i. e., occasionally he may find that progressions which will be 
 right in Close Harmony, will violate some rule if written in Dispersed Har- 
 mony. 
 
 After writing the above exercise in Dispersed Harmony, examine it with 
 the utmost care, by the questions on page 68. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIX. 
 
 COMMON CHORD OF III IN THE MINOR MODE. 
 
 The superfluous common chord is a very harsh discord. The tone which 
 forms a superfluous fifth with the fundamental note produces the harshness. 
 "See Remarks in relation to the diminished fifth, on page 44.] 
 
 The superfluous fifth is a discord of the third class. It must be 
 prepared, and must ascend one degree. 
 
 Whenever VII of the minor scale is the tone which is the discord 
 m any chord, it must resolve by ascending one degree. 
 
 Note. — VII of the minor scale cannot descend without descending a su- 
 p rfluous second, and discords are allowed to move only a minor or a major 
 second, [see page 62,] consequently whenever this tone is the discord, it 
 citnnot descend, and therefore must resolve by ascending. On page 44 dis- 
 cords of the third class are described as being allowed only to descend. VII 
 o{ the minor scale is, of course, an exception to this rule. 
 
 A tone which requires a preparation must appear as a concord in 
 the previous chord, and in the same part. 
 
 In the first measure of the fillowing example, the second chord is a su- 
 perfluous common chord. The treble (Gfr) is the superfluous fifth. In the 
 previous chord, also, the G^ sharp appears in the treble, and in this previous 
 chord it (the G^) is a concord, consequently in that example the superfluous 
 fifth is properly prepared. 
 
 A superfluous fifth is not allowed to follow a perfect fifth in sim- 
 i5a.- motion, nor can a perfect fifth follow a superfluous fifth in 
 tmiiiar motion. 
 
 That is, consecutive fifths, where one is superfluous and the other perfef , 
 are not allowed. 
 
n 
 
 COMMON CHORD OF III IN THE MINOR MODF.. 
 
 The common chord of III can resolve to the common chords of I, IV 
 and VI. 
 
 1 1 
 
 III I 
 
 1 2 
 III I 
 
 1 3 
 
 III I 
 
 2 1 
 
 III I 
 
 2 2 
 
 III I 
 
 2 3 
 
 III I 
 
 3 1 
 HI I 
 
 3 2 
 III I 
 
 3 3 
 III I 
 
 1 1 
 
 III IV 
 
 12 13 
 III IV III IV 
 
 2 1 
 
 III IV 
 
 2 2 2 3 
 III IV m IV 
 
 3 1 
 III IV 
 
 3 2 3 3 
 III IV III IV 
 
 1 1 
 
 111 VI 
 
 1 2 
 
 III VI 
 
 1 3 
 III VI 
 
 2 1 
 
 III VI 
 
 2 2 
 
 III VI 
 
 2 3 
 III VI 
 
 3 1 
 III VI 
 
 3 2 
 
 III VI 
 
 3 3 
 III VI 
 
 Write at least three examples of each progression contained in the tables, 
 placing before each chord of III a chord which contains a tone that will 
 prepare the discord, i. e , a chord which contains the tone which is the su- 
 perfluous fifth in the chord of III, and which in that chord is a concord. 
 
 The above contains three examples of the first progression of the first table. 
 Before each chord of III, the chord of V is placed, because it contains a 
 tone (Gii) which will prepare the discord. In the chord of V, G# is the 
 major third, and is consequently a concord. In the chord of III it is the su- 
 perfluous fifth, and is consequently a discord which requires a preparation. 
 It will be noticed that in each measure the discord and the tone which pre- 
 pares it are in the same part ; that i.>*, in the first nicasure both the G sharps 
 are in the treble, in the second measure both the G sharps are in the alio, 
 and in the third measure both the G sharps are in the tenor. 
 
 The following measures contain one example of each of the progressions 
 contained in the tables. The student should invent at least two more oi 
 each, so that there may be as many examples of each of the progres.^ions 
 contained in the tables as there are of the first progression of the first table, 
 in the preceding example. It will be seen that in the preceding example 
 in the first measure the superfluous fifth is placed in the treble, in the second 
 measure it is placed in the alt(\ and in the third measure it is placed in tha 
 tenor. The .student should endeavour to place it in a different part (when 
 possible) in each of the measures which he writes. In the following exam 
 
COMMON CHOUI) OF III IN THE MINOR MODE. 
 
 73 
 
 flies, where it is possible, the superfluous fifth is placed in the treble. In 
 the two additional meMsures of each progression, which the student is ex- 
 pected to write, it is presumed he will write it in the alto and tenor. 
 
 1 2 
 
 in I 
 
 1 3 
 
 III I 
 
 '^'^spj-s; 
 
 -f3- -^- 
 
 ^=F^ 
 
 ^W^ 
 
 Mn:^ 
 
 _*_:^:^ 
 
 3 1 
 
 V III I 
 
 #?#?-- J~ -4t?4f«--? - 
 
 ^ • 
 
 
 ^ P 
 
 "I — ( — r 
 
 :pp: 
 
 3 
 V III 
 
 :i^£^zz^ 
 
 * g 
 
 :zr— rZTCI 
 
 Cannot be done IjecHUse 
 tlie superfluous filth chii- 
 not resolve. 
 
 :t 
 
 (Cannot he done because 
 the suiierfluous fifth can- 
 
 II 12 13 
 
 III IV V HI W V III IV 
 
 2 1 
 
 V III IV 
 
 2 2 
 
 V III IV 
 
 
 ii-r.-^-' 
 
 rzz — 1 — ^- 
 
 
 :^'"n.~i ' 
 
 
 - 
 
 { 
 
 i 
 
 Cnrinot be done wiih- 
 «>iit itroducing forbid- 
 den fifths. 
 
 ::r=:*zt= 
 
 
 mi 
 
 : 
 
 \ 
 
 - r=-r~-^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ' 1 ■ 
 
 ' 1 
 
 
 
 
74 
 
 COMMON CHOUD OF III IN THE MINOR MODS. 
 
 11 12 
 
 III VI V III VI 
 
 1 3 
 
 III vr 
 
 2 1 2 2 
 
 V III VI v m VI 
 
 --^-— 1-^~ 
 
 E --H-=i'- 
 
 |;z^::q:iq^ 
 
 -=^-=Th" 
 
 1 — i — 1 
 
 
 
 :zp:^:.- 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 ' ( 1 
 
 ' 1 ' 
 
 -d m • 
 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 3 with Own Melody, according to the di- 
 rections in Chapter XXVIII. 
 
 Practical Exercise No. 3. 
 
 
 ^5 
 
 
 Write Practical E.vercise No. 3 with Given Melody, according to the di- 
 rections in Chapter XXVIII. 
 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 3. 
 
 pieiSisiSgisiiiiiii 
 
SEQUENCES. 
 
 75 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 3 in Dispersed Harmony, according to the 
 directions in Chapter XXVIII. 
 
 CHAPTER XXX. 
 
 SEQUENCES. 
 
 King of kings and 
 
 for ev-er and ev-er, Hal-le-lu jah, Hal-le-Iu jah. 
 
 1^ 1^ ^ ^ 1^ ^ ^ 
 
 for ev-er and ev-er, Hal-le-lu-jah, Hal-le-Iu-jah. 
 
 kings . 
 
 ^ ^ ^ ^ b* ^ I , 
 
 for ev-er and ev-er, Hal-le-lu-jah, Hal-le-lu-jah. 
 
 A strain which is repeated one or more times at a higher or lower 
 pitch, is called a Sequence. 
 
 The above example is from the Hallelujah Chorus of the Messiah. The 
 first strain is repeated twice, each time at a higher pitch, and "s consequently 
 a sequence. 
 
76 
 
 SEQLTENCES. 
 
 The first strain of a sequence is called the Figure. 
 
 The smallest number of chords of which a figure can consist is two. Of 
 oourse any number larger than two may be employed to form a figure. 
 
 In the repetition of the figure Rules 1, 2 and 3 must be observ- 
 ed, but all other rules may be violated, except those which relate to 
 discords which require a preparation. 
 
 In the construction of the figure all rules must be observed, but in the re- 
 petitions it is not important that any except Rules I, 2 and 3 should receive 
 attention. 
 
 The foUowincr exercises consist of figures composed of the fewest possible 
 number of chords Although a figure may be repeated any number of times, 
 it is not usual to repeat it more than twice. 
 
 
 mmM 
 
 it t .-[n 
 
 m$mmm 
 
 In the above example the first measure forms the figure, and the second 
 and third measures contain the repetitions, each one degree higher than the 
 previous one. 
 
 Write two repetitions of the following figures, each a degree higher than 
 the previous one; i. e., like Exercise No. 1, which is written out in full as 
 an example. 
 
 No. 2 
 
 No. 5. 
 
 No. 7. 
 
 Write two repetitions of the following figures, each a degree lower than 
 the previous one; i. e., like Exercise No. 8, which is written out in f I'l aj 
 an example. 
 
SEQUENCES. 
 
 7T 
 
 No 8. 
 
 ;i£=^: 
 
 
 ^i^: 
 
 
 1 
 
 ■=R-f 
 
 — iliiilisil 
 
 No. 9. 
 
 No 10. No. 1 
 
 No. 14. 
 
 RniMARK. — In the fourth chord of Exercise No. 8 there are two lead- 
 inor i\otes, one of which (in the base) descends. This is contrary to Rule 
 IV, whieh says that the leading note must ascend. Accordincr to this Rule 
 two leading notes cannot be taken in any one chord, because they must both 
 ascend, which would produce consecutive octaves or primes (unisons). In 
 this fourth chord also the diminished fifth (F) does not resolve according to 
 the rules. The violations of these rules, however, are permitted, because in 
 sequences all the rules which have thus far been given can be violated, ex- 
 cept Rules 1,2 and 3, and those which relate to the superfluous common 
 chord. 
 
 When the chord of VI follows the chord of V, the third in the 
 chord of VI must be doubled. 
 
 ^ There is no progression more common than for VI to follow V, and none 
 in which consecutive fifths and octave?!, and wrongly resolved leading notes 
 are more liable to occur. In the following sequence the figure is repeated 
 eleven times, giving the progression V VI in every minor key. The student 
 should practice it on the piano until able to play it readily from memory. 
 
 No. 15. 
 
 J__ _._ J ^ 
 
 Key of Key of 
 
 Key of Key of 
 
 I — 1 — -^-r 
 
 V VI V 
 [6»] 
 
 K " " ' " '- " *" 
 Gi 
 
 F minor. F ^ minor. G minor. G # minor 
 
 
 Key of Key of 
 A minor. B\) minor. 
 
 VI 
 
78 
 
 SEQUENCES. 
 
 liiliiiiiifelii 
 
 Key of Key of 
 B minor. C minor 
 
 Key of Key ot 
 C^ minor. D minor. 
 
 Key of 
 Dff minor. 
 
 Key of 
 E minor. 
 
 8,.. ... 
 
 
 EEE 
 
 1 
 
 VI 
 
 VI 
 
 Write the same chords, in the same keys, in the following positions 
 No. 16. No. 17. No. 18. No. 1». 
 
 Key of 
 F minor, &c 
 
 I p— |- 
 
 V VI 
 
 In Exercise No. 1.5, the trehle is the fundamental note, the alto is the 
 third, and the tenor is the fifth of the chord. In No. 16, the trehle is the 
 fundamental note, the alto is the fifth, and the tenor is the third of the chord. 
 In No. 17, the treble is the third, the alto is the fifth, and the tenor is the 
 fundamental note. In No. 18, the treble is the third, the alto is the funda- 
 mental note, and the tenor is the fifth. In No. 19, the treble is the fifth, 
 the alto is the fundamental note, and the tenor i.s the third. In No. 20, the 
 treble is the fifth, the alto is the third, and the tenor is the fundamental note. 
 Consequently the above exercises, when written out in full, embrace every 
 possible position of the progression V VI in every minor key. 
 
 Key of Key of 
 E minor. D^ minor 
 
 Key of 
 D minor 
 
 Key of 
 C^ minor. 
 
 Key of 
 C ininiir. 
 
 Key of 
 minor. 
 
 .hi- 
 
 I-T-U-Ji- 
 
 ^iiiiiiiii^iiii 
 
 VI 
 
 VI 
 
SEQ,UENCES. 
 
 79 
 
 
 Key of Key of 
 _ F# minor. F minor. 
 
 I — T~r"^r"i I r~T~r ^g*~'i^r — p— I 
 
 .!Ziii[iz:i — izrizzi — iir:zrr~ i7r:~ r— I 
 
 V VI V VI V VI V VI V 
 
 Key of Key of Key of Key of 
 B[) minor. A minor. G# minor. G minor 
 
 VI V VI 
 
 Exercise No. 21 gives an example of the chords contained in the six pre- 
 vious exercises, descending. Liiie Exercises No. 15, it should be practiced 
 until the student can play it readily from memory. 
 
 Write the same chords, in the same keys, in the following positions : — 
 
 No 23. 
 
 No. 93. 
 
 No. 34. 
 
 No. 25. 
 
 No. 3«. 
 
 Key of 
 E minor, &c* 
 
 :9—:r 
 
 Key of 
 E minor, &,c, 
 
 III 
 
 #*- 
 
 Key of 
 E minor, &c 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 Exercises No 21, 22, 23, 24, 25 and 26, when written out in full, em- 
 brace every possible progression of VI V in every minor key. 
 
 Remark. — It will be well for the student to invent sequences containing 
 three, four, five, six and more chords in the figure. 
 
 Although a proper sequence cannot be made with less than two 
 chords, passages like Exercises No. 27, 28 and 29, are called Onb 
 Chord Sequences, because the same rules are allowed to be broken 
 in writing them that are allowed to be violated in sequences. 
 
 No 97. 
 
 L 
 
 ^?:t5 
 
 
 =n:ip«z5r»z:p;:p|:r 
 
 i=g 
 
 ICT 
 
 Aa 
 
 6 6 6 
 
80 
 
 PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 No 89. 
 
 
 In each of tl ese exercises, (Nos. 27, 28 and 29) the base moves by !h« 
 same degrees, i e., in Nos. 27 and 28 by seconds, and in No. 29 by tb rds. 
 When the base moves equally in this manner the passage is called a one- 
 chord sequence, (meaning that the figure is composed of one chord only,) 
 and the same liberties can be taken with the rules as in regular sequences. 
 In one-chord sequences, like Exercises Nos. 27 and 28, three parts must 
 move regularly like the base. It is of course impossible that fuur parts 
 should move in this manner, because of consecutive octaves, so that one part 
 must move irregularly. In No. 27 the tenor moves irregularly, and in No.. 
 28 the alto moves irregularly. In other respects Nos. 27 and 28 are alike. 
 From the twenty third to the thirty-first chord, in Practical Exercise No. 1, 
 forms a one-chord sequence like No. 29. The sixteenth and seventeenth 
 chords in Practical Exercise No. 1 form the figure of a regular sequence, 
 and the four succeeding chords form the repetitions. 
 
 See if there are any sequences in Practical Exercises Nos. 2 and 3, and .( 
 there are any point them out. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXI. 
 
 PRACTICAL EXERCISE 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 4 with Own Melody, according to the dr 
 ctions in Chapter XXVIII. 
 
 Practical Exekcise No. 4. 
 
 E3ElEEtel'EiE^F=gE=EEEiEE:^EI?5fiI 
 
PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 'mMwBim^M&m 
 
 4f#5#5 
 
 S33tiiiiiiiiiiiigsf 
 
 ##5 
 
 ##5 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 4 with Given Melody, according to the di- 
 rections in Chapter XXVIII. 
 
 MeSodj of Practical Exercise No. 4. 
 
 -6#- 
 
 ^^^f^ 
 
 "j~: 
 
 psgilgfSigii 
 
 
 rp-n^ f 
 
 ,,__, 
 
 SgSiii&lfiilS 
 
 -d-i 
 
 glggggasiiEgiie 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 4 in Dispersed Harmony, according to the 
 directions in Chapter XXVIII. 
 
 The student should carefully examine every chord hy the questions on 
 page 63, and should now add the following additional questions : — 
 
 9. Is the superfluous fifth rightly used ? 
 10. Is there a sequence in the exercise, and if so is it rightly used? 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 5 with Own Melody, according to the di- 
 rections in Chapter XX\'III. 
 
 Practical Exercise No. 5. 
 
 H 
 
 giiliiggg 
 
 ^^5 
 
 b'i^^S 
 
83 
 
 PRACIICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 
 iggsgiggin 
 
 ^5 
 
 5 ^ 
 
 fc|t^5 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No 5 with Given Melody, according to the di 
 rections in Chapter XXVill. 
 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 5. 
 
 [T 
 
 ^M^mmMmm^w^ 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 5 in Dispersed Harmony, according to <be 
 directions in Chapter XXVIII. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 6 with Own Melody. 
 Practical Exercise No. 6. 
 
 « « # # ii * l5 
 
 # a if ^ * ft 
 
 :ee 
 
 l<^* * 
 
 ^^i 
 
 m^—"- 
 
 
 S 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 6 with Given Melody. 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 6. 
 
 sifgggg^igs^ 
 
PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 Pl»-»lt 
 
 pfi^s&ggiiffiig 
 
 ^ppiifigiiiiii 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 6 in Dispersed Harmony. 
 Write Practicd Exercise No. 7 with Own Melody 
 Practical Exercisb No. 7. 
 
 gggflifig^ii^i 
 
 b bb bbb bbs bb #5 #5 # # # # 
 
 b ^ 
 
 §"i3?iglgiteSlSi3 
 
 b bs b5 ^* 
 
 b # 
 
 t*^ b 
 
 iffl3E 
 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No, 7 with Given Melody. 
 MeJody of Practicai Exercise No. 7. 
 
 
 5^^^gSl^ 
 
84 CHORD OF ^IV IN THE MINOR MODE. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 7 in Dispersed Harmony. 
 
 Eeimark. — One of the most important exercises connected with the stndy 
 of the practical exercises, is the jilacing of the Roman figures under each 
 chord, as directed in Chapter XXVfll. Great care should be taken in thus 
 writing these Roman figures, and they should on no account be omitted in 
 any exercise 
 
 CHAPTER XXXII. 
 
 CHORD OF SSIV IN THE MINOR MODE. 
 
 ■ A common chord of which i^lV is the fundamental note, is often 
 ased in the minor mode. It is composed of a fundamental note, a 
 tone which is a diminished third from the fundamental note, and a 
 tone which is a diminished fifth from the fundamental note, and is 
 called a Double Diminished Common Chord. 
 
 Common chord of sharp Common chord of sharp Common chord of sharp 
 four in the key of A four in the key of E four in the key of D 
 minor. minor. minor. 
 
 Each tone of the double diminished common chord has a fixed 
 resolution. Tho fundamental note must ascend one degree, the di- 
 minished third must descend one degree, and tho diminished fifth 
 !nust move as in the chords of II and VII. 
 
 The chord of ^IV can resolve to the chords of I and V 
 
CHORD OF ^IV IN THE MINOR MODE. 
 
 85 
 
 Remark.— When the chord of #IV is followed by the chord of I, the 
 diminished fifth cannot resolve, and it is therefore free. [See page 64.] 
 Wheu it is followed by the chord of V, the diminished fifth must resolve, 
 because the chord V contains tones to which it can resolve. 
 
 1 1 
 
 #IV I 
 
 I 2 
 
 #IV I 
 
 1 3 
 
 #IV I 
 
 2 1 
 
 ^IV I 
 
 2 2 
 
 #IV I 
 
 2 3 
 
 ftIV I 
 
 3 1 
 
 ^IV I 
 
 3 2 
 
 #IV I 
 
 1 3 3 
 
 j #iv I 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 V 
 
 #IV 
 
 2 
 V 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 V 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 V 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 V 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 V 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 V 
 
 3 
 
 V 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 V 
 
 One example of each progression contained in the tables is given below. 
 As in the tables previously given, the student should invent at least two more 
 examples of each progression. 
 
86 
 
 CHORD OF #IV IN THE MINOR MODE. 
 
 2 
 
 Cannot b > done. 
 Wh) .' 
 
 
 
 ~B 
 
 3 
 
 #IV 
 
 lncomp)ete. 
 
 'i' 
 
 3 
 
 
 -:^5^^-=i=^! 
 
 — ^- 
 
 3 
 
 -i 
 
 =^ 
 
 3 
 
 4»1V 1 cannot be done unless more than four parts are emplojed. In the 
 example it will be seen that 1 has no fundamental note. There ure three 
 
 11 
 E's and one C in the chord, but no A. ^IV V are incomplete, because 
 there is no B in the chord of E, and there cannot be one without pro<lucii>i» 
 the kind of consecutive fifths which are forbidden in RuJe Vll It wjU 
 
 readily be'seen that #IV V muat be incomplete, (there is no fifth in V,) urs- 
 
 H 3 
 less more than four parts are employed. Both that progression and ^IV I 
 can be done with tivo p;irts. as in the following example. Some writers 
 hold that the diminished fifth must not skip when it is in the ba;>e. If this 
 
 :i 3 3 1 
 
 doctrine is correct, ^IV I and #1V V cannot be done at all. 
 
 Practice the foHowinor exercise in all the minor keys, until able to p!af il 
 readily from memory in every key. 
 
 2 3 
 
 ^IV I 
 
 2 
 
 -— i — r- 
 
 f|plpp|iig!ii|ti 
 
PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 87 
 
 2 S 2 1 
 
 Note. — The progressions ^IV I and #IV V are by far the best progres. 
 Bions in which the chord of :|^IV can be used, and it is very seldom used in 
 any other. If the student practices the last exercise thoroughly, in the kcya 
 E, B, F#, C^, G^, D, G, C, F, Bb and £[? minor, he will be perfectly fa- 
 miliar with the chord as it is usually used. 
 
 Add to the questions on pages 68 and 81, the following :— 
 
 11. Is the sharp four rightly used ? 
 
 1^. Is the diminished third rightly used? 
 
 CHAPTER XXXm. 
 
 PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 8 with Own Melody, accorr ng to the di 
 rections in Chapter XXVIII. 
 
 Peactical Exercise No. 8. 
 
 # #6 6 #6 6 #6 ^5 6 
 
 
 « #6 #5 # 6 #6 # 6 #6 4^ 6 
 
 6 6665 ^6 664^666 666 
 
 ^6 6 6 # 6 bp 6 
 
 ^^^^^^^^^ 
 
 ^« # #^ # # 6 ^ 
 
 8 # 
 
 #6 I S 
 
B8 
 
 PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No 8 with Given Meiody, according to the di- 
 rections in Chapter XXVIII. 
 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 8. 
 
 
 td- 
 
 ^iSiS§l 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 8 in Dispersed Harmony, according to the 
 directions in Chapter XXVIII. 
 
 Remark. — In Practical Exercises Nos. 1 , 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7, the chords 
 are all in the first form. [See Chapter XIV.] In Practical Exercises Nos. 
 8,9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 and 15, all three forms are employed. On pa2;e69 an 
 example of Practical Exercise No. 1 is given, with the chords written out in 
 full, as a model of the manner in which the succeeding; exercises are to be 
 written. The following is Practical Exercise No. 8 written nut in full, pre^ 
 cisely as the student is expected to write the Given Melody of No. 8 and the 
 succeeding exercises It is presumed the student has already writfi-n Prac- 
 tical Exercise No. 8, and he should now compare his Given Melody with the 
 following, and see that it is precisely like it. 
 
 -#- • -J- -#- • 
 
 12 11 21 11 1222 
 
 1 II V VI n V I V I VII I vn 
 
PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 89 
 
 p3;^Ei«5ErfefiEa4%4iE^ 
 
 2 2 
 
 I n 
 
 -•- ^^- -p- -p- -•- 
 
 
 iEliHi^iliilEifli 
 
 211122 112 2 11 
 
 II V IV I VII I V I VII I V 
 
 
 
 —I— t-- 
 
 
 1 1-p— ^ 
 
 fl _4 5_ 
 
 #6 
 
 iiEiS^l^iiilifiliiJ 
 
 2 2 
 IV II 
 
 3 112 
 
 IV I VII 
 
 R 6 # fi 6 6 6 6 6_^_^._i^^__^ 
 
 2 2 
 
 I n 
 
 1 
 
 V 
 
 :ziip: 
 
 2 2 2 
 
 I VII I 
 
 12 2 2 12 
 
 rv vn I u V vii 
 
HW 
 
 PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 
 VI 
 
 VII 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 #8 
 
 I' 
 
 EdligT^ggg 
 
 r^^ 
 
 2 
 VII 
 
 2 
 
 VII 
 
 2 2 
 
 I #IV 
 
 2 
 
 #IV 
 
 
 ^-T-6 ^T -^- T-^ — T rr 
 
 #IV 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 9 with Own Melody. 
 PuACTiCAL Exercise No. 9. 
 
 — »-:«Tf?::~] 
 
 lSf6 6 
 
 6 6 
 
 4=Jl 
 
 6 4 ^3 feje 6 i? 4f6 6 6 6 i^ he *^5 
 
 
Practical exercises. 
 
 6 « I 6 bs $ 4 «« - ^ - - ^ - - - - - 
 
 6^5 6 $l!5 S#C66 
 
 4 ^ 4 3 4" 
 
 -lTi:^=T:^T=^t2d"3]HT^;^IJ 
 
 tt* — 1— iTn — ^T — I — iT^-4iTr~^iTn — \m — ^t^-lst 
 
 g 
 
 5 #6 6 #6 6 6 
 
 4 3 IT -n 
 
 5 
 
 4 3 
 
 ""5 I 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 9 with Given Melody. 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 9. 
 
 :§igii}ig|ii^s^s 
 
 |EP^^fe:J^jfe|Ffe: 
 
 
 :'T~~^'rzj:. 
 
 T=M-^ 
 
 +-^T— 
 
 ^FiR^T^F 
 
 Ti=T;^T 
 
 5W:=_g«szi^3'~i^H^BHiaf5T 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 9 in Dispersed Harmony. 
 
 Bemark. — On page 37 the remark is made, that a chord is not allowed to 
 stand alone in a key. There is one exception to thi.s rule. Irt the minor 
 mode, a chord which has for its fundamental note tlie tone which is Jlat six 
 of the key in which the previous and succeeding chords belong, is allowed 
 to stand alone. The thirty-eighth chord in Practical Exercise No. 9 is one 
 of this character. It is the chord of VI in the key of C minor, while the 
 chord before it is the chord of VI in G minor, and the next chord after it is 
 the chord of V in G minor, and it therefore stands alone in a key, contrary 
 t'^ the rule given on page .37. Its fundamental note, however, is Ab. and 
 A() is flat six m the key of G minor, the key in which the previous and suc- 
 ceeding chords belong, consequently it comes within the exception to the 
 rule, as given above. The fifty-seventh chord also contains a violation of 
 t rule which is explained in the remark on page 206. 
 
8 PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 10 with Own Melody. 
 Peaoticai, Exercise No. 10. 
 
 ^mm^M^^mm 
 
 #6 6 6 # #6 4f 6 
 
 6 # 
 
 # 6 6 ^5 # #5 #6 6 #5 # #6 # #6 # 
 
 #5 # #6 # #6 # 
 
 # 
 
 #6 # #6 ' 6 6 # 6 #6 #5 6 #6 # 6 #6 # 
 
 # 
 
 :tf6 6 6 # 5 6 #6 6 # 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 10 with Given Melody. 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 10. 
 
 
PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 93 
 
 Remark. — Rule IV requires that the leading note should ascend. Ta 
 he seventeenth chord of Practical Exercise No. 10, according to the Given 
 Melody the leading note cannot ascend without leaving the next chord in- 
 complete, for if the alto should have E in the eighteenth chord, there would 
 be no B in the chord. By the remark on page 43, it will be seen that Rule 
 IV can be broken if there is a good reason for so doing. In the passage al- 
 uded to, the rule is broken for the sake of giving a more satisfactory close 
 to the strain. It will be readily seen that when the letter which is the fun- 
 damental note is taken for the treble at the close of a strain, the effect is 
 more satisfactory than when either the third or the fifth of the chord is 
 taken. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 10 in Dispersed Harmony. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 11 with Own Melody. 
 
 Practical Exercisk No. 1 1 . 
 
 6 6 
 
 4 
 
 ^6 6 6 6 5 
 b 4 ^ 
 
 ^issiiiiisgiga 
 
 ^#6 6 ^6 6^5 
 
 6 6 6 ^6 ^5 6 6 i^6 
 
 6 6 6 8 6 6 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 11 with Given Melody 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 11. 
 
 FSiiiS 
 
 ^6 6 
 4 
 
 
 5^i^^» 
 
94 
 
 PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 11 in Dispersed Harmony. 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 12 with Own Melody. 
 Practical Exercise No. 12. 
 
 6 ^ 6 
 
 # #5 
 
 « 5 ^ 
 
 #6 
 
 6 # #6 • :t^6 #5 #6 #6 
 
 #6 #6 
 
 siiigjiii^iiirpiiiigia 
 
 6 6 #6 # #6 6 6 ^ ^6 6 a 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 12 with Given Melody. 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 12. 
 
 
 ;=t 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 12 in Dispersed Harmony. 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 13 with Own Melody 
 
PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 Peacsicai Exercise No. 13 
 
 9« 
 
 rEACSICAl liXEKCISE IMO. I«>. 
 
 66 6 ^6 6 ^^45 
 
 iggiiiipiigiiiil 
 
 5 25 
 
 4 *^ 
 
 - te 6 6 
 4 4 '^ 6 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. l3 with Given Melody. 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 13. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 13 in Dispersed Harmony. 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 14 with Own Melody. 
 Pkactical Exercise No. 14. 
 
 <: A R A R R .kR R ft a 6 
 
 6 6 
 
 
 ^6 6 6 6 6 
 
 6 6 # 6 6 4^ X6 # # 6 #5 
 
hi 
 
 CHORD OF II WITH ^4 IN THE MINOR MODE 
 
 
 #6 4^5 6 #6 6 #5 
 
 g-jjgfgggg gg ll 
 
 66666666 6 6 5 
 
 4 3 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 14 with Given Melody. 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 14. 
 
 i^i^:^ 
 
 Sa^Ig^^S^i^ 
 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 14 in Dispersed Harmony. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIV. 
 
 CHORD OF II WITH Jf^A IN THE MINOR MODE. 
 
 In Chapter XXXII sharp four is treated as if it was one of the tones oi 
 the minor scale. 
 
 In :he combination of the tones of the scale into chords, sharp 
 rouLT must be considered as one of the tones of the minor scale. 
 
 This does not mean that when the minor scale is played or sung, sharp 
 'our must be introduced into it, but only that when the minor scale is com 
 
CHORD OF II WITH ^4 IN THE MINOR MODE. 
 
 97 
 
 bined into the various chords, sharp four must be used in the various combi- 
 nations as if it was an integral member of the minor scale. 
 
 According to this rule, the fundamental note of evury chord which con- 
 tc ns four of the scale, can also be the fundamental note of a chord which 
 ci.ntains sharp four. II is the fundamental note of a chord which contains 
 IV of the scale, consequently, II is als ) the fundamental note of a chord 
 which contains sharp four. 
 
 The Chord of II with ^4 is composed of a fundamental note, 
 a tone which is a major third from the fnndamental note, and a 
 tone which is a diminished fifth from the fundamental note. It is 
 called a Major Diminished Common Chord. 
 
 Common chord of two 
 with sharp four, in the 
 key of A minor. 
 
 Common chord of two 
 with sharp four, in the 
 key of E minor. 
 
 :«: 
 
 Common chord of two 
 with sharp four, in the 
 key of D minor. 
 
 It will be seen that no new rule is required for this chord. Sharp foui 
 must resolve as in the chord of 4rIV, [page 84,] and the diminished fifth 
 must be used as in the chord of II. 
 
 The chord of II with ^4 can resolve to the chords of I and V. 
 
 1 1 
 
 II:i*4 I 
 
 12 13 1 
 1I#4 I II#4 I 1 
 
 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 .S 
 
 \m I n#4 I 11^4 I 
 
 3 1 3 2 13 8 
 U^A I 11^4 I 1 114^4 I 
 
 II#4 
 
 1 
 V 
 
 1 
 n#4 
 
 2 
 
 V 
 
 im 
 
 3 
 V 
 
 2 
 11^4 
 
 1 
 V 
 
 1 2 
 IIi*4 
 
 2 
 
 V 
 
 2 
 II#4 
 
 3 
 V 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 V 
 
 3 
 
 IIf^4 
 
 2 
 
 V 
 
 3 
 
 n#4 
 
 3 
 V 
 
 Remark. — Sharp four is a species of leading note, and like the leading 
 note must resolve by ascending one degree. 
 
 One example of each progression contained in the tables is given be'ov. 
 As in the tables previously given, the student should invent at least two more 
 examples of each progression. 
 
 [9] 
 
CHORD OF II WITH ^IV IN Tlir MINOR MODE. 
 
 -if* ^^— 
 
 Incomplete. 
 
 -Pl= 
 
 5S:=S: 
 
 :t 
 
 T^:«i- 
 
 
 •— -«- 
 
 -• ( 
 
 --'^- 
 
 ^S 
 
 ._?!— ISi 
 
 The two examp/es marked incomplete, can be made complete with in 
 »art8, as follows .— 
 
BECAPITULATION OF COMMON CHORDS. 
 
 M 
 
 I 
 
 n#4 
 
 «• 
 
 ■-=r-=^ 
 
 
 mm 
 
 CHAPTER XXXV. 
 
 RECAPITULATION OF COMMON CHORDS. 
 
 Major Scale, 
 
 ^gl^iiipHii 
 
 I n m IV V VI vn 
 
 The common diord of I in the major scale is a major comnc mi 
 chord. 
 
 The common chord of il in the major scale is a minor commctn 
 chord. 
 
 The common chord of III in the major scale is a minor common 
 chord. 
 
 The common chord of IV in the major scale is a major common 
 chord. 
 
 The common chord of V in the major scale is a major common 
 chord. 
 
 The common chord of VI in the major scale is a minor common 
 chord. 
 
 The common chord of VH in the major scale is a diminished 
 
 cimimon chord. 
 
 Minor Scale. 
 
 i^lfPHlL^^^g 
 
 1 -^ 
 
 I n 
 
 
 vx vn 
 
UO RECAPITULATION OF COMMON CHORDS. 
 
 The common chord of I in the mmor scale is a minor commor. 
 3hord. 
 
 The common chord of II in the minor scale is a dmiinished 
 common chord. 
 
 The common chord of II with sharp four in the minor scale is a 
 major diminished common chord. 
 
 The common chord of III in the minor scale is a superfluous 
 common chord. 
 
 The common chord of IV in the minor scale is a minor common 
 chord. 
 
 The common chord of #IV in the minor scale is a double dimin- 
 ished common chord. 
 
 The common chord of V in the minor scale is a major common 
 chord. 
 
 The common chord of YI in the minor scale is a major common 
 chord. 
 
 The common chord of VII in the minor scale is a diminished 
 common chord. 
 
 The common chords of I, IV and V in the major scale, and V 
 and VI in the minor scale, are major common chords. 
 
 The common chords of II, III and VI in the major scale, and 1 
 and IV in the minor scale, are minor common chords. 
 
 The common chords of VII in the major scale, and II and VII in 
 the minor scale, are diminished common chords. 
 
 The common chord of II with ^A in the mmor scale is a major 
 diminished common chord. This chord cannot be used in a major 
 key. 
 
 The common chord of III in the minor scale is superfluous com- 
 mon chord. This chord cannot be used in a major key. 
 
 The common chord of #IV in the minor scale is a double dimirt- 
 ished common chord. This chord cannot be used in a major key. 
 
 The tones which compose major common chords are all free. 
 
 The tones which compose minor common chords are all free. 
 
 Of the tones which compose diminished common chords, itvo 
 nftli from the fundamental note has a fixed resolution. 
 
 Of the tones which compose superfluous common chords, tha 
 fifth from the fundamental note has a fixed resolution. 
 
 Of the tones which compose major diniiiiished comw »n chor(«« 
 
RECAPITULATION OF COMMON CHORDS. 
 
 101 
 
 ae to.ii -which is the sharp fourth, and the tone which is the fifth 
 
 from the fundamental note, have fixed resoUitions. 
 
 All the tones which compose double diminished common chords 
 
 have fixed resolutions- 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 15 with Own Melody in Dispersed Har- 
 
 mony. 
 
 Remark. — In the other practical exercises it has been required that the 
 Own Melody and the Given Melody should be in Close Harmony In this 
 exercise the order is reversed, and the Own Melody and Given Melody must 
 be in Dispersed Harmony. No. 15 is the concluding practical exercise com- 
 posed exclusively of common chords, and embraces every variety of common 
 chords, in nearly every form. 
 
 Pkacticai. Exercise No. 15. 
 
 S j^ 66 ^4 6 6 6U6k6^664 
 
 * 6 b 6 6 4^^ 
 
 ■- ^-^ — pt -r-r— ^-tb# I r-Tr-\—i-i'r-r-^- : 
 
 J-< C I /, I I A I I 
 
 ^^E^EE 
 
 Mb5 
 
 b5« b5 
 
 b 
 
 =EESa=iEPE^IESIErEBEEE^I^E-:i 
 
 bs « 5 6 ^^6 #6 
 
 Ms bfi b6 5 6 5 6 6 # ^5 g ^ ^5 b b5 
 
 6 I 6 6 # #5 g ^ ^5 b b5 
 
 be bs b-. be b« bo « ^5 #« be « #« # #« « 
 
 b b ^4 b *4 * # ^i 
 
 [9*] 
 
102 
 
 RECAPITULATION OF COMMON CHORDS. 
 
 ^g^giiili 
 
 1^—i 
 
 
 ■^F 
 
 * ^6 6 6 6 ^ 
 
 6 6 I ^ ^ 4 4 J « l>« ^ J 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 15 with Given Melody in Dispersed Har 
 mony. 
 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 15. 
 
fcECAPITULATION OF COMMON CHORDS. 
 
 103 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 15 in Close Harmony, 
 
 Kbmark. In the classification of the common chords of the minor fcal©, 
 
 f sharp four is treated as a member of that scale, we shall of course hare ? 
 chord of seven with sharp four. Such a chord would consist of a fundamen- 
 tal note, a minor third and a perfect fifth, and would of course be a minor 
 common chord. Its movements, however, must be much constrained, lae- 
 cause its fundamental note, (which is the leading note,) and its fifth, (which 
 is the sharp fourth,) have fixed resolutions. On this account it is seldom or 
 never used, and it has not been thought necessary to introduce it among the 
 common chords of the minor scale. 
 
 Common chord of VII Common chord of VII Common chord of VII 
 with sharp four in the with sharp four in the with sharp four in the 
 key of A minor. key of E minor. key of D minor. 
 
 
 VII#4 
 
 YU^ 
 
 K ^_,. 
 
 ^ 
 
 iiiiilillllii^i^ 
 
 r-^k^r^^^-^^rf^'^^f-^^ 
 
 
 "»" I I 
 
 5 g- 
 
 liiiiiiii 
 
€4 
 
 RECAPITULATION OF COMMON ( HORDS. 
 
 u I . ' . . . . 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 bjL b_» 
 
 d-i--*j^-4:^^. 
 
 E^S=?s^EpE=J=^EE=TEEE3 
 
 EEEEiEEElEEEEE3EEEIEEIEEE3 
 
 
 
 The above example contains the alto and tenor of Practical Exercise No. 
 15, It is presumed the student has already worked out that exercise accord^ 
 ing to the directions, and the alto and tenor of his Given Melody should no>« 
 be compared with the above example. 
 
RECAPITULATION OF COMMON CHORDS. 105 
 
 Remakk on Modulation. An exception to the rule which requires tha. 
 one chord should not stiiud alnne in a key, occurs in Practical Exercise No 
 9. Two more exceptions occur in Practical Exercise No. 15. Chorda 
 which belong in the minor mode, and whose proper resolution is in that key, 
 frequently resolve to the major key. In Practical Exercise No 15, there are 
 several instances where the chord of sharp four, instead of resolving to the 
 chord of one in the minor, resolv.^s to the chord of one in the major Such 
 resolutions aie always allowed, althoui/h it frequently causes a chord to stand 
 alone in a key. In one place in Practical Exercise No. 15, the chord of 
 five in D minor is introduced, and is immediately followed by the chord of 
 y\\ in G minor, thus leaving the chord of five to stand alone in the key of 
 D minor '1 he indefinite effect produced by the chord of VII is such, that 
 it is alloweil to succeed any chord, even if such chord is alone in the key 
 The following are the names of the chords in Practical Exercise No. 15. 
 The student should compare them with the Roman figures which, in accord- 
 ance with the directions in Chapter XXVIII, it is presumed he has already 
 written under the base notes of the exercise. 
 
 l2l|1lS|2l3|'il2|22 1|2 22 
 I IV V ! IV V VII ! I VI VII 1 I II VI 1 V II I i II I V 
 
 VI IV U^i\ V ■ I I II V iVII I r 1 I VI V I VII I i I I I V 
 I #^ 2 1 ! 1 1 1 ' 1 1 1 ' 1 1 3 '1 3 -' [3 1^^ 3 ■ 
 
 VI :^# 4f I III |iv II IV I V III V ivi II VII ,#iv I 4*iv I I V ^ «t ^i i 
 
 3 1113 11132 111 2 111 1 112 1 2 
 I V V I I V VII ! Ill VI V ! Ill IV V I III I V 1 III VI VI • 
 
 3 3 3 ! 2 ,3 2 13 2 21 1«|1 - -M 211 1 ]i 
 
 i^iv I ^iv! V #iv V ;#iv V ^iv! V' ! I VII 1 I IV I !v vn I 
 
 1^'212'2 3 2'1 2 112 1 ]| 1 2 2;33]; 
 
 V 1 I V VII i [ I n=H=4 1 V IV V I I VII I 1 IIrr4 I VIll I I V 
 
 1 1 112 2 ' 3 1 ' ] «; 
 
 VI IV I 1 II VI 1 I V I I ' I 
 
 Rkmark on the Major and Minor Sc.\les. — There is a very intimate re- 
 ation between major and minor scales which have the same signature. The 
 keys of C major and A minor have the same signature, and are called rela- 
 tives of each other. C major is the relative major to A minor. A mirior 
 is the relative minor to C major. So with G majnr and E minor, D major 
 and B minor. &,c. A chord frequently stands alone in a key, when the 
 next chord to it is in its relative key. There is also a relation between the 
 major and minor keys of the same letter, (for example, between A minor 
 and A major, &lc.) and a chord frequently stands alone in a key when the 
 next chord is in the other mode of the same letter. For example, the chord 
 of sharp four will not unfrequently stand alone in the key of A minor, but 
 be followed by the chord of one in A major. 
 
106 
 
 CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 Concluding Remarks on Common Chords. — If the student has 
 work id out all the exercises correctly, he is now familiar with the 
 use of common chords. He should now examine music of differ- 
 ent kinds, and notice how different authors use the common chords, 
 first taking psalm and hymn tunes, and then glees, anthems, cho- 
 ruses, &c. For example, suppose he takes a church music book in 
 which the first tune is Old Hundred, and proceeds to examine the 
 book with reference to the common chords. He finds the first 
 chord is I, the second chord is the same, the third chord is V, the 
 fourth VI, &-C. He notices whether the progression from V to VI 
 is according to rule, and notes every other peculiarity of thn 
 composition. In this manner he passes through the book. If rules 
 are broken, [see remark on page 2U6,J he should carefully examine 
 the passage, and form an opinion whether the author has acted ju- 
 diciously or not. The result of this exercise will be, that he will 
 become more and more familiar with the common chords, and at 
 the same time gradually acquire the ability to analyze music, and 
 acquaint himself with the styles of the various composers. [See 
 page 206.] It will also be useful for him now, to compose tunes 
 himself, using of course only common chords, and taking great care 
 to observe all the rides with which he is now familiar. 
 
 END OF TREATISE ON COMMON CHORDS. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVI. 
 
 CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH OF THE MAJOR SCALE. 
 
 A chord composed of a common chord, with a tone which is a 
 seventh from the fundamental note added to it, is called a Chord 
 OF THE Seventh. [See page 7.] 
 
 Chords of the seventh are indicated by a figure placed at the 
 right hand side of the Roman figure which indicates the common 
 chord. Thus, /; ienotes the chord of the seventh of one, Sec. 
 
CHORDS or THE SEVENTH. 107 
 
 From the above example it will be seen that each chord of the seventli 
 ccntains a common chord, and that each is formed by adding to each com 
 mon chord a tone which is the seventh from the fundamental note. Thua 
 the chord of the seventh of one is formed by the common chord of one, with 
 a tone added to it which is a seventh from the fundamental note, &c. 
 
 When a common chord forms a part of a chord of the seventh, 
 or of any other chord, its tones must receive the same treatment 
 that they would if the common chord stood alone. 
 
 In the chord of the seventh of seven, for example, the common chord of 
 seven, which forms a part of the chord of the seventh of seven, must be 
 treated precisely as when that chord stands alone, or in other words, pre- 
 cisely according to the directions in Chapter XXI. 
 
 Remark. — From this explanation of the nature of chords of the seventh, 
 the student will notice that he has only to learn the proper treatment of tht 
 tone which is the seventh from the fundamental note. With the proper treat- 
 ment of the other tones which form chords of the seventh he is already fa- 
 miliar, because in all cases they form common chords. Chords of the sev- 
 enth are composed of four tones. The first three of these tones, in all cases, 
 is a common chord, with which the student is now perfectly familiar. The 
 fourth of these tones is " the seventh''^ from the fundamental note, the proper 
 treatment of whicfi, in the various chords of the seventh, must now engage 
 the student's especial attention. 
 
 Note. — The tone which is the seventh from the fundamental note is 
 technically called simply "the seventh." The expressions, "the seventh 
 must descend," "the seventh must resolve," &-c., mean that "the tone 
 which is a seventh from the fundamental note" must descend, &c. The 
 student must take particular notice that all remarks about the seventh apply 
 exclusively to that one tone which is the seventh from the fundamental note. 
 As the other tones included in a chord of the seventh always form acommoft 
 chord, and as the subject of common chords has been fully treated and dis- 
 po.sed of, it is of course altogether unnecessary to say anything further about 
 them. 
 
 All sevenths are discords of the second or third class. [See 
 page 44.] 
 
108 CHORD OF THE SEVENTH OT T. 
 
 The chord of the seventh of I is composed of a major common 
 chord and a major seventh. It is called a Major Chord or the 
 Seventh. 
 
 The chord of the seventh of II is composed of a minor common 
 chord and a minor seventh. It is called a Minor Chord of the 
 Seventh. 
 
 The chord of the seventh of III is composed of a minor common 
 chord and a minor seventh. It is called a Minor Chord of the 
 Seventh. 
 
 The chord of the seventh of IV is composed of a major common 
 chord and a major seventh. It is called a Major Chord of the 
 Seventh. 
 
 The chord of the seventh of V is composed of a major common 
 chord and a minor seventh. It is called the Chief Chord of the 
 Seventh. 
 
 The chord of the seventh of VI is composed of a minor common 
 chord and a mmor seventh. It is called a Minor Chord of the 
 Seventh. 
 
 The chord of the seventh of VII is composed of a diminished 
 common chord and a minor seventh. It is called a Diminished 
 Chord of the Seventh. 
 
 The chords of the seventh of I and IV are major chords of- the 
 seventh. 
 
 The chords of the seventh of II, III and VI are minor chords of 
 the seventh. 
 
 The chord of the seventh of V is the chief chord of the seventh. 
 
 The chord of the seventh of VII is the diminished chord of the 
 seventh. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVn. 
 
 chord of the seventh of v. 
 
 In the chord of V7 the seventh is a discord of tlie second claesL 
 It must descend, but does not require a preparation. 
 
CHOUD OF THE SB:VENTH OF V. 
 
 109 
 
 This is by far the most important of the chords of the seventh. It is met 
 vith in common music almost as frequently as the common chords, while the 
 Dther chords of the seventh are of comparatively rare occurrence In some 
 English works, the chord of I is called the chord of the tonic; the chord of 
 II, the chord of the super-tonic; the chord of III, the chord of the mediant; 
 the chord of IV, the chord of the sub-dominant ; the chord of V, the chord 
 of the dominant ; and the chord of VI, the chord of the super-dominant. 
 In these works, the chord of the seventh of V, is, of course, called the chord 
 of the seventh of the dominant, or, for the sake of brevity , the chord of the 
 dominant seventh. In German works this chord of the seventh is called 
 Haupt Septimen Accorde, or chief chord of the seventh. 
 
 In the chord of V7 the seventh may be repeated and resolve in a 
 different part. 
 
 For example, if the seventh appears in the alto, the chord may be rep at 
 pd, and the seventh appear in the treble, or the tenor, or the base, and there 
 resolve In the following example, in the first chord, the seventh is in the 
 a to. The second chord is a repetition of the first, and in it the seventh ap- 
 pears in the treble, and there resolves, consequently it resolves in a different 
 part fiom that in which it first makes its appearance. In most chords of the 
 seventh, the seventh must resolve in the part in which it first appears, and 
 the chord cannot be repeated ; but this liberty is allowed in the chord of V7. 
 
 ]Ei=?EEB 
 
 m 
 
 ii^^im 
 
 1 
 V7 
 
 When the chord of Y^ resolves to the second form of the com- 
 Hon chord of I, the seventh is allowed to ascend. 
 
 [ro] 
 
110 
 
 CHORD OF TUE SEVENTH Ol V. 
 
 This is the only case in which the seventh is allowed to ascend, in anj 
 chord flf the seventh in the major scale. 
 
 Chord of V 7, first ChordofV7,8ec- 
 form, in the ond form, in the 
 key of C. key of C. 
 
 Chord of V 7, third 
 form, in the key 
 ofC. 
 
 Chord of V7, 
 fourth form, 
 in thekey of C. 
 
 -»— 
 •' — 
 ■| — 
 
 -It 
 
 2 
 
 V7 
 
 :^zz: 
 
 eee£ 
 
 ''1 
 
 3 
 V7_ 
 
 
 # - 
 
 j#_ 
 
 • — - — 1#- 
 
 4 
 
 V7 
 
 ^_ 
 
 The chord of V7 in both the major and minor scales, is com^ 
 posed of a major common chord, with a tone which is a minor 
 seventh from the fundamental note added to it, consequently the 
 chords of V7 in both the major and minor keys, are alike, and 
 must receive precisely the same treatment. Practical Exercises 
 16 — 21 contain examples of this chord in both the major and minor 
 keys. 
 
 Chord of V7 in the key Chord of V7 in the key 
 ofG. 
 
 -H- 
 
 3=^ 
 
 Chord of V7 in the key 
 ofF. 
 
 :t^=: 
 
 s 
 V7 
 
 ■0- 
 4 
 V7 
 
 Chord of V7 in the key Chord of y7 in the key 
 of A minor. 
 
 -- J— I— I- 
 
 
 ' % \ \ 
 
 Chord of V 7 in the key 
 of D minor. 
 
CHORD OF THE SEVENTH OF V. 
 
 Ill 
 
 Play the chord of V 7 in the four forms, as in the above examples, in all 
 the keys, major and minor. ' 
 
 Remark. — As a chord of the seventh contains four tones, it nr iist of course 
 have four forms. [See Chapters XIV and XLIX.] 
 
 When the chord of V7 is followed hy the chord of I, one of the 
 chords must be incomplete. 
 
 ;i--J-=tfp==?c=8: 
 
 1 
 
 iiiiiliiiii^iiii 
 
 Vt 
 
 V7 
 
 In the first of the above examples V 7 is complete, and I is incomplete. 
 As B, which is the leading note, must ascend, and F, which is the seventh, 
 must descend, it will be seen that it is impossible to have a fifth (G) in the 
 chord of I. In the second of tbe above examples, V7 is incomplete, having 
 no fifth (D) in it, and I is thus made complete. When, in succeeding exer 
 cises, the student is required to write the progression V7 I, he can take hil 
 choice which to make incomplete. 
 
 Add to the questions on pages 68, 81 and 87, the following : — 
 13. Is the seventh rightly used ? 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 16 in Close Harmony, with Own Melody 
 according to the directions in Chapter XXVIII, taking especial care tha 
 V7 is correctly used. 
 
 Practical Exercise No. 16- 
 
 liiiEgtiiiifgigiiig 
 
 6 #6 
 i 
 
 ^^m^^wMMm 
 
 H ^ i J! ^^i 
 
 s 
 
 ^67 
 
112 
 
 CHORD OF THE SEVENTH OF T. 
 
 iiii-iiS3irggriii£iii 
 
 6 # 
 
 6 C 
 
 5 b5 
 
 ^4 6 
 
 6 6 6 
 5 
 
 V 
 
 nz:i]:i::J:-i:i7=!=z| 
 
 ■■- - - b7 6 be 
 
 #6 6 7 
 4 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 16 with Given Melody, in Close Harmony. 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 16. 
 
 
 ti 
 
 ri:^-:»i:^-^.i 
 
 ^igamiigiiJiigig 
 
 pr-^f 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 16 in Dispersed Harmony. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 17 in Close Harmony, with Own Melody. 
 
 Pr.\ctical Exercise No. 17. 
 
 i^|g;^s3^^^===^^^ 
 
 #« #^| t»b5 I 
 
 #6^1 6 ##| 8#6 ^1 
 
CHORD OV THE oEVENTH OF V. 
 
 iia 
 
 -. — I — r 
 :Ez:E 
 
 6 #6 
 
 
 6 6 7 
 
 4 
 
 4 6 £[6 
 
 ^4 
 2 
 
 #6 
 
 
 g: 
 
 n — ^"i ^"i~i — rr 
 
 >j:i!:4 6 6 ^5 6 
 
 ^6 (i 5 
 
 ^6 6 5 
 
 4 ?r 
 
 ^6 6 7 
 4 
 
 =L=^E!3;EiFB=EFt^^F"£EI?EB-IEPi£?EI 
 
 e 5 # 
 
 5 
 
 — * — i:i~si:^ 
 
 gg 
 
 
 #66667 
 
 iii-sa 
 
 6 6 7 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 17 with Given Melody, in Close Harmony. 
 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 17. 
 
 -4- ItH- 
 
 :izc. 
 
 ^IlI^ilfegg^gEjl*:^ 
 
 
 Ff^i 
 
 Ft?3?^^gSiS 
 
 :=:lT:~[i:T:r::: 
 
 n — ^' 
 
 gE^EEEEBEE^EEEIEESE'iliE^EEEEEE 
 
 [10'] 
 
*I4 CHORD OF THE SEVENTH OF V. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 17 in Dispersed Harmony. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 18 in Close Harmony, with Own Meljdy 
 
 Pkactical Exercise No. 18. 
 
 G 6 4 6 
 
 4 2 
 
 S; 
 
 mmsm m^Ts ^m 
 
 7 6 
 
 
 |66' #4 6 #6 B66 
 
 |.^— f— »— ^r^ r-i — ^' — ^^-r-t — f— 4t*— ^— 7- 
 
 
 n 
 
 mMSimi^lM^M 
 
 /i 
 
 G n 
 5 
 
 6 r> 
 3 
 
 ^.___ 
 
 sii^i^^igpliiiPE-iiO 
 
 S ' 
 
 ^5 
 
 6 
 
 4 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 18 in Close Harmony, with Given Melodv 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 18. 
 
CHORD OF THE SEVENTH OF T. 
 
 115 
 
 iiin^iEips^ 
 
 #- — 
 
 e-f-i 
 
 mm^^mm^ 
 
 E:=EEEI 
 
 '-^^wmM^mi 
 
 M^M 
 
 »3i 
 
 wm^ 
 
 g^i^g^iiiioB 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 18 in Dispersed Harmony. 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 19 in Close Harmony, with Own Melody. 
 Practical Exercise No, 10. 
 
 6 6 # ^4 6 6 
 
 I 1 « **^. «^| 
 
 
 M I ^1 M^5 «tf6 6i| 1,5 6fl^ 
 
 n ^ ■# 
 
 ^ ' H # ^ ^ 
 
Jib CHORD OF THE SEVENTH OF V. 
 
 fiiii?isg;?l§s:iiS^lgEl 
 
 
 fi €^7 fi 7 fi 7 
 
 5 7 
 
 4 *r 
 
 5 4 5 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 19 in Close Harmony, with Given Melody. 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 19. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 19 in Di.-^persed Harmony. 
 
 When the chord of V7 is followed by the chord of V7 in another 
 key, it is not necessary for the seventh to resolve. 
 
CHORD OF THE SEVENTH OF V. 
 
 117 
 
 
 2 4 
 
 @: 
 
 ^liiif 
 
 I i 
 
 In the above example the first chord is the chord of the seventh of five in 
 he key of C. The seventh (F) does not resolve according to rule, but 
 ascends to G, when according to the rule it should descend toE. The pro- 
 gression, however, is correct, because the second chord is also the chord of 
 the seventh of five, although in another key (the key of F.) 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 20 in Close Harmony, with Own Melody, 
 
 Practical Exercise No. 90. 
 
 m^ m^ mmms mm 
 
 i^^ 
 
 6 7 
 
 bbe 7 b5 6 6 6 {5^5 
 4 P5 ^ 
 
 '^-^ ^- ^ 4 ^ (f 6 6 ^ 7 ^ - 
 
 b 5 
 
 6 6 
 
 4 
 
 i_ l_ 
 
 lil-3lSli?ii&!SiiP[f 
 
 6 « 6 7 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 20 in Close Harmony with Given Melody. 
 
lis CHORD OF THE SEVENTH OF V. 
 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 20. 
 
 Write Practical Exprci>e No. 29 in Dispersed Harmony. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 21 in Close Harmony, with Own Melody. 
 
 PkACTICAL EXKRCISE No. 21. 
 
 6 6 #4 6 
 
 4 'i 
 
 4? 6X6 ^ii4 6 § 
 
 islgpgii'Iilgiigiiif 
 
 ii4 6 4 
 ^2 iJ 
 
 4 2 
 
 esiiiiiiiiiigsiigiiii 
 
 5 ' 
 
 f, fi 4 6 * 
 
 4 2 fe; 
 
 *! * I 
 
 i 
 
 -«?,•': 
 
 
 * % 
 
 ^5 4 X 
 
CHORD OF THE SEVENTH OF V. 
 
 liQ 
 
 
 i 
 
 « % ^ 
 
 7 6 7 6;^ 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 21 in Close Harmony, with Given Melody. 
 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 21 
 
 igiiigigiis^ 
 
 -#-« 
 
 !gfc_irz-J:::zT:l-pz:r±tT;riTz:rf_:zf:li:^:^i-gitr 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. S»l in Dispersed Harmony. 
 
 The Pillovvinor is Practical Exercise No. 16, with Given MeMy. It is 
 presumed the student has already written it, and he should now ( ompar^ hia 
 txercise with this, and see if it corresponds, and if not, notice if the i/^ria- 
 lions are violations of rules, or non-essential differences. 
 
 -^-^ 
 
 -*..« 
 
120 
 
 CHORD OF THE SEVENTH OF V. 
 
 Key of C 
 
 I Key of G. I Key of C. 
 
 Key of A 
 minor. | Key of G 
 
 
 *s 
 
 iiiEgE*ifisi:iii?=f 
 
 4 2 
 V7 I 
 
 3 1 
 
 Y^ I 
 
 4 2 
 V7 I 
 
 3 
 V7 
 
 VI 
 
 I Key of I Key of I Key of I Key of I 
 
 1 D minor. | A minor. | E minor. | D minor. | KeyofC 
 
 1111 
 
 IV Vt I I 
 
 4 2 
 Vt I 
 
 1 1 
 V7 I 
 
 4 2 4 2 4 2 
 
 V7 I V7 I Vt I 
 
 Key of G. | Key of F. | Key of C. | Key of A minor. 
 
 -A ^-r-^ — 
 
 ^ 1)7 5,6 (I * B 4 *^ 
 
 ;E?EEeEasE!EI,=sEtE^5^lEzPEpFE^ 
 
 1 1 
 V7 I 
 
 1 1 
 V7 I 
 
 VI II 
 
 Vt 
 
 I Key of G. I Key of F. | Key of C. 
 
 
 -0—\ 
 ■\0—\ 
 -»— 
 
 
 iE^ii?^^ 
 
 «t,i 
 
 
 m^^mmM 
 
 1 1 
 I I 
 
 -i 1 
 V7 I 
 
 2 14 2 2 2 2 
 
 V7 I V7 I II m IV 
 
 3 1 
 Vt I 
 
CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH OF THE MINOR SCALE. 121 
 
 I Key of I I [Key of I 
 
 IC minor.! KcyofC. iKeyofF. iFminor. | KeyofC, 
 
 Jl ,1 II IIJI: . 
 
 -•- * -0- -0- -&- 
 
 -i r- -i ^ 
 
 L I 
 
 T-ri — r 
 
 i 9 
 
 11 1 'l 12 3 1113 3 1 
 
 VI III IV II V #IV I Vt I V7 I I I 
 
 Remark. — The rule has been given that a chord must not stand alone 
 !n a key, but that either the churd next before or after it must be in the 
 same key, and two or three exceptions to this rule have been stated. It is 
 frequently the case that a chord belongs to one key when considered in rela- 
 tion to the chord b fore it, and in another key when considered in relation 
 to the chord which comes after it. 
 
 The last chord in a tune must be m the same key with the first 
 chord in tlie tune. 
 
 According to this rule, the last chord in Practical Exercise No. 16 is the 
 chord of I in the key of C Considered in relation to the chord which goes 
 before it, however, it is the chord of V in the key of F minor, i. e , it is 
 both the jhord of I in the key of C, and the chord of V in the key of F 
 minor, j^ pparently the last chord but one stands ah-ne in the key of F minor, 
 but in re.'.iity it is followed by another chord (the chord of V) in the same 
 key. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVIII. 
 
 CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH OF THE MINOR SCALE. 
 
 -T 1 i ±Z ' ±Z-^ g— I 
 
 i=i=^i^i^s=H 
 
 ~i- — % — m' — -S- — 9 — gS — ^ — ^ — 'f 
 
122 CHORD OF THE SEVENTH OF THE MINOR SCALE. 
 
 The chord of the seventh of I in the minor scale, is compc BCf. 
 of a minor common cliord and a major (or large) seventh. Ii is 
 called a Minor Large Chord of the Seventh. 
 
 The chord of the seventh of II is composed of a diminished 
 common chord and a minor seventh, it is called the Diminished 
 Chord of the Seventh. 
 
 The chord of the seventh of 11^4 is composed of a major dimin- 
 ished common chord and a minor seventh. It is called the Major 
 Diminished Chord of the Seventh. 
 
 The chord of the seventh of III is composed of a snperfluons 
 common chord and a major seventh. It is called the Superfluous 
 Chord of the Seventh. 
 
 The chord of the seventh of IV is composed of'a minor common 
 chord and a minor seventh. It is called a Minor Chord of thk 
 Seventh. 
 
 The chord of the seventh of #IV is composed of a donble dimin- 
 ished common chord and a diminished seventh. It is called the 
 Triple Diminished Chord of the Seventh. 
 
 The chord of the seventh of V is composed of a major common 
 chord and a minor seventh. It is called the Chief Chord of the 
 Seventh. 
 
 The chord of the seventh of VI is composed of a major common 
 chord and a major seventh. It is called a Major Chord of the 
 Seventh. 
 
 The chord of the seventh of VII is composed of a diminished 
 common chord and a diminished seventh. It is called the Double 
 Diminished Chord of the Seventh. 
 
 No two chords of the seventh in the minor scale are alike. 
 
 The chord of the seventh of II in the minor mode is like the 
 chord of the seventh of VII in the major mode. 
 
 The chord of the seventh of IV in the minor mode is like the 
 chords of the seventh of II, III and VI in the major mode. 
 
 The chord of the seventh of V in the minor mode is like thecho" \ 
 of t \e seventh of V in the major mode. 
 
 The chord of the seventh of VI in the minor mode is like th« 
 cko- Is of the seventh of I and IV in the major mode. 
 
DOUBLE DIMINISHED CHORD OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 123 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIX. 
 
 THE DOUBLE DIMINISHED CHORD OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 The most important chord of the seventh in the minor mode, is the (herd 
 of the seventh of five. As this chord is precisely like the chord of the seventh 
 of five in the majnr mode, exercises upon it have been introduced incoi/nec- 
 lion with the chord of the seventh of five in the major scale, and the student 
 is now presumed to be familiar with this chord in both the major and minor 
 scales. The chord of the seventh which may perhaps be ranked next in im- 
 portance to the chord of the seventh of five, is the chord of the seventh of 
 seven in the minor mode, (the double diminished chord of the seventh). 
 
 In the chord of VII7 in the minor mode, the seventh is a discord 
 of the second class. It must descend, but does not require a pre- 
 paration. Like the chord of V7, [see page 109,] this chord can be 
 repeated, and the seventh can resolve in another part than that iu 
 which it first makes its appearance. 
 
 Chord of VII 7 in the 
 key of A minor. 
 
 Chord of VII 7 in the 
 key of E minor. 
 
 ChordofVIl7 in the 
 key of D minor. 
 
 _ I I I 
 
 « — « — «- 
 — « — « — i- 
 
 12 3 4 
 VII7VII7VII7 VII7 
 
 S 
 
 Phf the chord of VII 7 in every minor key. It will be noticed that this 
 chord is not fiund in the major scale, i. e., there is no double diminished 
 chord of the seventh in the major mode. 
 
 PtEMARK. — It will perhaps aid the student somewhat, to notice that if a 
 chord is a double diminished chord of the seventh, (i. e., if it is composed 
 of a diminished common chord and a diminished seventh,) it is alwaya 
 the chord of VII7. If a chord is a chief chord of the seventh, (i. e., if it is 
 2omposed of a major common chord and a minor seventh,) it is always the 
 fhord of V7. In such cases there can of course be no difficulty in deciding 
 what the key is. 
 
 Note — As the common chord in the chord of VII7 is a di!<ninished 
 common chord, there will of course be three tones in the chcwd >f VII 7 
 
124 
 
 DOUBLE DIMINISHED CHORD OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 which have a fixed resolution, viz., the fundamental note, (which is the 
 leading note,) the fifth, (which is a diminished fifth,) and the seventh. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 22 in Close Harmony, with Own Melody, 
 taking especial care that the double diminished chord of the seventh (Vll-r) 
 is correctly used. 
 
 Practical Exercise No. 23. 
 
 ^1 6 6 7 #b7 ^k7 G 7 ^4 
 
 6 I #|>7 ^p7 
 ^ ^5 P5 
 
 ^--! 
 
 giif^sipggiiigi 
 
 
 3 #*•! ##^ 
 
 
 4 6 #6 
 t> 
 
 gliSSEsiiiigs-igif 
 
 ^=f*6 :^4i4 64^6 6 7 
 
 I Ji^ =^1 =*^5 ' ^'^ ^1 
 
 ^3 
 
 r±ziC--»d:?:i*ij--:^:ln.=nin:ri:in.in:J^:^-l#-:#zl 
 
 ^4 4 7 4 ^4 
 3 3 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 22 in Close Harmony, with Given Melody. 
 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 22. 
 
 s^sssii^if^if 
 
 i^3! 
 
 ^eiSgi^ 
 
DOUBLE DIMINISHED CHORD OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 125 
 
 ipiiiiiiHisgjiiis 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 22 in Dispersed Harmony. 
 
 In both the chief and the double diminished chords of the seventh, 
 the seventh can remain stationary, but must resolve when it leaves 
 the degree of the scale on which it first appears. 
 
 m 
 
 \[ ^ 
 
 ^- 
 
 VII 7 IV 
 
 :~9' 
 
 :^: 
 
 mm 
 
 Vt 
 
 Tn the first measure of the above example, the first chord is the double di- 
 minished chord of the seventh. The seventh is F. In the second chord 
 the F remains. In the third chord the treble no longer has F, and so it 
 (the treble) resolves just as it would have done if the second chord had not 
 intervened. If several chords had intervened between the first chord and 
 the chord which resolves the seventh, (i. e., the third chord.) it would have 
 been correct, provided the part which has the seventh remained upon the 
 same degree of the scale, (i. e , provided the treble had remained upon F.) 
 In the second measure, the chief chord of the seventh is treated in the same 
 manner. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 23 in Close Harmony, with Own Melody. 
 Practical Exercise No. 23. 
 
 m- 
 
 w 
 
 6 =It*' •i " ~ 
 
 [11*] 
 
 I ^ ^^^ 
 
 7 4 
 
 :^ '6 ^7 6 ^7 
 
i2(r 
 
 DOUBLE DIMINISHED CHORD OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 mmMmm^m 
 
 6 6 #6 '6 4^6 6 7 6 #5 
 
 r 
 
 6 6 6 6 
 
 5 4 5 
 
 
 jji 4 5^5 
 
 g#- 6 ^7 6=^f- 6 7 
 
 te7 
 
 
 6 ^^?" #6 6- 6#6 #^6tef7 4f6 6 # 6 # ^* 
 4 ffi 7 4 ^5 7 4 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 23 with Gi\en Melody, in Close Harmony. 
 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 23. 
 
 
 ?3lisiia|lgl§il£ia 
 
 -i — ^^ — ^. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 23 in Dispersed HarnK ny. 
 
 Write P'acticai Exercise No. 24 in Close Harmony, with Own Melody 
 
DOUBT^E DIMINISHED CHORD OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 Practical Exercise No, 24. 
 
 127 
 
 
 # 6 7 
 
 I' 
 
 5 5 
 
 X6 :tt ##4 6 ^7 #4 6 7 ^ %| 
 
 #^ 6^7 
 
 *S 
 
 
 6^7 ##4 6 7 ##4 6 #6 
 ^ «fr ^ 
 
 ssgggsiL^iiigil 
 
 ##4 6X6 6 ^ ^7 #6 
 
 ^4 ^5 
 
 6 # #4 # 
 5 ^ 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 24 with Given Melody, in Close Harmony. 
 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 24. 
 
 i-#-^T T — T r rri — i-in — i-rn— n-r j— n: 
 
 ^gliJiiiSifS^I 
 
128 DOUBLE DIMINISHED CHORD OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 -#.-:#r-'-^- 
 
 
 3zi=-pirl-r-_c:i:rzzr 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 24 in Dispersed Harmony. 
 
 A discord which does not require a preparation need not resolve 
 when the chord which contains it is followed by the double dimin- 
 ished chord of the seventh. 
 
 ■i 
 
 r— » P«. 
 
 ©— j 
 
 
 V7 VHt 
 
 In the above example, the first chord is the chord of V^ in the key of C. 
 The second chord is the chord of VII 7 in the key of F minor. F in the 
 first chord is a seventh, and is a discord which does not require a prepara- 
 tion. It does not resolve, because the chord which contains it is followed 
 by the double diminished chord of the seventh. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 25 in Close Harmony, with Own Melody 
 Pkactical Exercise No. 25. 
 
 6 
 
 ^6 
 
 b5 
 
DOUBLE DIMINISHED CHOKD OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 129 
 
 67 6b7 66 tf6 6 6^ 
 
 * 5 4 7 
 
 ^r run i ^ 
 _p— r:t#:zf:z?:: 
 
 ^5 4 7 
 
 ^feibl-^;:FE3EEtEE«ZEFE=E^iEE*£^Ei 
 
 ^-* 6 6 ^ ^6 6 6 i^ 
 
 ^6 [,1 ^6 G ■•'^6 [j7 6 6 6 6 6 
 
 ^ b5 i b5 ^ . 
 
 § 5 ^6 ^6 b7 b 6 b b5 K bs bb'7bb4 b7 
 
 3 bs ^ b ® ^ 
 
 4 .» - ^ [J 
 
 6 7 6 6 7 te6 6 G G "•" 4 
 
 4 ^447 g 
 
 4 
 
 b 
 
 Ixercise No. 25 in Close Harmony, with Given Melody 
 
 Write Practical E 
 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 25 
 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 25. 
 
 — fc-E — i — i — i~ri — I — i~rH — ! — l~rz! — ' — '"c 1 
 
 I I . 
 
 '^^fE^U=t^'E^.E^^EW^ip^ 
 
130 
 
 DOUBLE DIMINISHED CHORD OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 
 i^^iiiii{ii}ii=ggf 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 25 in Dispersed Harmony. 
 
 KEMAUKABLE PROPERTIES OF THE DOUBLE DIMINISHED CHORD OF TUB 
 SKVENTII. 
 
 Each tone of the double diminished chord of the seventh can le 
 taken for a fundamental note. 
 
 No. 1. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 — ^- 1 1_. 
 
 ■M- 
 
 
 i 
 
 Each of the above chords is the chord of VII 7, and each is composed ol 
 the same tones. In the first measure the tones of the four chords rema^i in 
 the same position, so that if played on a piano it will be simply striking the 
 same tones four times. The chords in the second measure are the same as 
 those in t^e first but arranged so that the fundamental rot£ ia the lowest 
 
DOUBLE DIMINISHED CHORD OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 Ul 
 
 -one of each chord. T'he first chord in the above example is the chord of 
 VII 7 in the key of A minor. The second chord is the chord of ¥117 '" t^^a 
 key of C minor. The third chord is the chord of VII 7 in the key of Ejj 
 Qiinor. The fourth chord is the chord of VII 7 in the key of F# minor. 
 
 No. 9. 
 Key of A minor. 
 
 Key of C minor 
 ± 
 
 Key of E\) minor. 
 
 6: 
 
 VII 7 
 
 Remark on Modulation, — Modulation means a transition from one kej 
 Jo another. It is always desirable to make this transition with as little ab- 
 ruptness as possible. If none of the tones of the chord which makes the 
 modulation beJong in both keys, the modulation will be very abrupt. The 
 more tones there are in the chord which makes the modulation, which belong 
 in both keys, the m<xe easy and natural will the modulation be. 
 
 No, 3. 
 
 :iE5rj 
 
 H-ir-i- 
 
 
 «•- -w- 
 
 Sif-glElil^ 
 
 12 13 
 I 11 V V 
 
 1 S 2 I 
 
 V I vn I 
 
 2 3 11 
 II I V I 
 
 The above example commences in the key of C, and at the fifth chord mo- 
 dulates to the key of B. The fifth chord (i. e., the chord which makes the 
 nifidulation,) is composed of the tones F^, A^ and Cfi=, neither of which be< 
 Songs in the key of C. It will readily be noticed that the modulation is verj 
 abript and unpleasant. 
 
 No. 4, 
 
 -i=S=|zJ-8-f«iJ=:SEI=^^tt 
 
 i— I— ; 
 
 ij^gg il 
 
 5 1 
 I V 
 
 112 1 
 
 V7 VI n Vt 
 
132 DOUBLE DIMINISHED CHORD OV THE SEVENTH. 
 
 Tlie preceding example commences in the key of C, and at tlie fiftj chord 
 modulates to tlie i<oy of F. The fifth chord (i. e , the chord which makes 
 he modulation,) is composed of the tones C, K, G and B\). Three of these 
 .ones (C, E and G,) belong in hoth keys, (i. e., in the key of C and the key 
 ofF,) and it will be readily noticed that the modulation is easy and natural. 
 
 All the tones of the double diminished chord of the seventh l>elongin four 
 dilTerent keys, (.-ee Examples Nos. 1 and 2,) it is consequently a very useful 
 chord for modulation. 
 
 12 3 1 1 I 4 S 1 I 
 
 I II I V I VII7 VII7 I V I 
 
 The above example is a modulation from the key of A minor to the key of 
 C minor. The seventh chord makes the modulation, and all its tones Mong 
 in both keys. 
 
 Note. — If the student finds any difficulty in writing the following exer- 
 cises, he can refer to the scales in Chapter XXIII. 
 
 Write and play a strain somewhat similar to the above, and by means cj 
 the double diminished chord of the seventh 
 
 Modulate from the key of A minor to the key of E[j minor. 
 Modulate from the key of A minor to the key of Fif minor. 
 Modulate from the key of E minor to the key of G minor. 
 IModulate from the key of E minor to the key of B\) minor. 
 Modulate from the key of E minor to the key of C^ minor. 
 Modulate from the key of B minor to the key of D minor. 
 Modulate from the key of B minor to the key of F minor. 
 Modulate from the key of B minor to the key of G^ minor, 
 jModulate from the key of F4? minor to the key of A minor. 
 Modulate from the key of Fi^ minor to the key of C minor. 
 IModulate from the key of F# minor to the key of Df: minor. 
 Modulate from the key of C# minor to the k(^ of E minor. 
 Modulate from the key of Off minor to the key of G minor. 
 Modulate froc the key of C# minor to the zey of A# minor. 
 IModulate frtrt the key of C^ minor to the kjy of B minor. 
 Modulate from the key of G# minor to the key of D minor 
 
DOUBLE DIMINISHED CHORD OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 Modulate from the key of G# minor to the key of Eir minor. 
 Modulate from the key of D^ minor to the key of F# minor. 
 Modulate from the key of D^ minor to the key of A minor. 
 Modulate from the key of D^ minor to the key of B# minor. 
 Modulate from the key of D minor to the key of F minor. 
 Modulate from the key of D minor to the key of At? minor. 
 Modulate from the key of D minor to the key of B minor. 
 Modulate from the key of G minor to the key of B[j minor. 
 Modulate from the key of G minor to the key of D^) minor. 
 Modulate from the key of G minor to the key of E minor. 
 Modulate from the key of C minor to the key of E[; minor. 
 Modulate from the key of C minor to the key of G\) minor. 
 Modulate from the key of C minor to the key of A minor. 
 Modulate from the key of F minor to the key of A[j minor. 
 Modulate from the key of F minor to the key of C[j minor. 
 Modulate from the key of F minor to the key of D minor. 
 Modulate from the key of B^j minor to the key of Dfj minor. 
 3Iodulate from the key of Bj? minor to the key of Fb minor. 
 Modulate from the key of Bf? minor to the key of G minor. 
 Modulate from the key of Ef) minor to the key of G[;) minor. 
 Modulate from the key of E^ minor to the key of B[j[j minor. 
 Modulate from the key of E[? minor to the key of C minor. 
 
 The do jble diminished chord of the seventh is composed of tones 
 distant a minor third from each other, or, as it is sometimes ex- 
 pressed, of three minor thirds placed one over the other. Although 
 this chord is generally used according to rule, such is the peculiar 
 effect produced by it, that it is sometimes used as if all its tones 
 were free. 
 
 Practice i\\e above progression until able to play it fluently. 
 
 When the double diminished chord of the seventh is played 
 complete, with both hands, if the right hand descends by half steps, 
 and the left hand ascends by whole steps, the same tones (letters^ 
 will be play 3d by each hand. 
 [12] 
 
134 DOUBLE DIMINISHED CHORD OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 I I I I ^i I jL. __ . 
 
 A change in the character representing a tone which does not 
 alter the tone itself, (as from Ab to G^, Git to Db, A-c.^} is called 
 an Enhar>ionic Change. 
 
 Some writers t.ike the liberty to resolve the doable dimint.shed choral o! 
 the seventh to a distant key, without making the puh.irmonic ch^nwe. Th« 
 first chord, as written in the following example, is tiie chord of VII7 in tlie 
 key of A minor. It is resolved at once into the key of V-^jr misvor, withvuai 
 making the enharmonic change of F^ to E#. 
 
 Concluding Remark in reference to the Double DiMiNistrKD Ciiokb 
 OF THE Seventh. — Although this chord is so useful and effective, it is no< 
 easy to sing progressions in which it is used, and in cmparison with the 
 chief chord of the seventh, it is seldom used in vocal nmsic. 
 
 I Key of I KcA' I Kev nf f Krv I K^y of I 
 Key of D minor |A minor | of A } Gminor [ utO f F iiiiiit^ Key of F 
 
 n . ' .1 *^l 4l 
 
 12 21 21 111) 11 
 
 I VII7 I I H VII, I VIIt I VII7 ! Y1 
 
DOUBLE DIMINISHED CHORD OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 135 
 
 Key of I Key I Key of | Key 
 C minor | of C | D min 
 
 i— H '—^- 
 
 I Key I Key of I Key I 
 • I C minor | of C | D minor | ofO | Key of A minor 
 
 r :J -•- -*■ • , r r 
 
 1 J 1 1 3 2 3 2 2 14 
 
 V7 I V I VIIt I VII7 I :^IV V VII7 
 
 Key of G minor 
 
 Key of F minor 
 
 I I J. 
 
 I Key I Key of 
 I of F I C minor 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 _i ^ 
 
 3 1 4 
 VIIt I VII 7 
 
 ( Key of D minor 
 
 VII 7 
 
 2 4 
 I VII 7 
 
 iT — 4P— p-^-» — . — ^-| r ( — r I — I 1 — •■ 
 
 #1 
 # # 
 
 zcizrrz: j 
 
 V i^IV 
 
 3 
 VII 7 
 
 3 3 111 14 
 
 V7 IV VII7 I V7 VI VHt 
 
 Key of I 
 A minor | Key of D minor 
 
 I Key of I Key 
 I G minor | D mil 
 
 
 -I 
 
 ^6 fa, 7 
 
 "S==^f3E3=TE=±F^" 
 
 ■g— :i=- 
 
 4. 
 
 -.=5,q 
 
 §Epil^H3=Sg^P 
 
 3 2 13 11 
 
 VII7 VII7 VII7 VII7 V7 VI 
 
 2 1 1 S 1 2 
 n V7 VI V7 I I 
 
.86 DIMINISHED CHORD OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 I Key of I 
 
 I • A minor | Key of D 
 
 >}: i 9 J ^J: J: V ^^ 
 
 ^4 6 6 ^4 
 
 4f»- 3 2 2 13 1 1 
 
 3 3 13 Vt I 11 VIIt IV V7 I 
 
 V7 IV VII7 IV 
 
 The above is Practical Exercise No. 22, It is presumed the student has 
 already written it, and he should now compare his exercise with this, and see 
 if it corresponds, and if not, notice if the variations are violations of rules, 
 or non-essential differences. 
 
 CHAPTER XL. 
 
 DIMINISHED CHORD OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 The chords of VII7 in the major mode, and IT7 in the minor 
 mode,, are diminished chords of the seventh. 
 
 The common cliord in the diminished chord of the seventh is a diminished 
 common chord. In the chord of \'l\i, in the major mode, tliree of the tones 
 have fixed resolutions, viz., the fundamental note, (whith is the leading 
 note,) the fifth, (which is a diminished fifth,) and the seventh. In t ho chord 
 of TI7 two of the tones have fixed resolutions, viz , the fifth, (which is a di- 
 nini.s!>ed fifth,) and the seventh. 
 
 In the diminished chord of the seventh, the seventh is a discord 
 of the second class. It mnst descend, but does not re(iiiire a pre- 
 paration. Like the chord of V7, (see page 109,) this chord can be 
 -e,peated, and the seventh can resolve in another i)art than that in 
 •vhich it first makes its appearance. 
 
 Although the same liberties are allowed this chord that are allowed th« 
 hief chord of he seventh, it is usually used in conformity with the rules. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 2G in Close Harmony, with Own Melody, 
 
dijiinished chord of the seventh. 
 Practical Exercise No, 26. 
 
 137 
 
 ii^iH^^giS=^fiiil]i 
 
 n 
 
 « #6 
 
 i 
 
 i^^Ep^gi:3irE^;E|s^|p: 
 
 
 ^7 
 
 i^r^mzm^m^ 
 
 6 #6 
 
 6 #4 #4 6 #6 4^6 
 
 6 #6 
 
 ):#- 
 
 :p=q:, ^ 
 
 EigilPilEpS 
 
 ;} 
 
 ^5 
 
 4 be ^4 ^5 
 
 #4 6 
 
 b 
 
 7 
 
 b5 
 
 ^ff \ 
 
 -1— n-^"-f ^-^•-'t^^ Fr- r-^F^-r*--^-B-=3-p4 
 
 j,:iHx_[:rz:-rzzp[:r-rir^-[:r-r=|#z[:!^i.^zirr:}: 
 
 7 b7 K 7 ^5 [,7 b b7 he # 
 
 5 b5 fe} 4 
 
 I — \~^ — d ~~r L r — ! — 1 I 
 
 EJzEEEZEfFEFf^E3j3EiEJ 
 i ^ i i 
 
 ■7-lz\ 
 
 SEPEEE^EE 
 
 PiEMAUK. — Some writers allow a discord which does not require a ] ire- 
 paiation to be used without a proper resolution, when there is a tone t<j 
 which it could resolve in the next chord. In the last chord but one, in Pi ac 
 tical Kxercist! No. 26, the base is the seventh in the chord of V7 Accc rd 
 ing to rule it should go to B, but as there is a B in the chord, although is 
 another part, the liberty is taken to make it go to G Such a license is 
 however, seldom taken by the beat composers. 
 [12»] 
 
138 SEVENTHS WHICH NEED A PREPARATION. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 26 with Given Melody, in Clos Harmony. 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 26. 
 
 iiEgyE|||gi|t^g^|Eg 
 
 !-=ES;EEgEEEEEEEEEEgE=EEEI 
 
 :*-&fJiE&iE»E?=fe: 
 
 
 I r 
 
 
 tE^EEEE 
 
 ;^=M 
 
 -dizJ^P^: 
 
 ^=1 
 
 EEf 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 26 in Dispersed Harmony. 
 
 CHAPTER XLT. 
 
 SEVENTHS WHICH NEED A PREPARATION. 
 
 The seveiitlis in the major, minor and superflnous d ords of the 
 BBVjnth, are discords of the third class. [See pages 44 am 71 ] 
 Til 3y must be pre]>ared. and descend one degree. 
 
SEVENTHS WHICH NEEI* A PREPARATION. 
 
 139 
 
 The chords < fly and IV 7 in the major mode, and Vly in the minor 
 mode, are major chords of the seventh ; II7, III7 VI7 in the major mcde, 
 and IV 7 in the minor mode, are minor chords of the seventh ; and III 7 in 
 the minor mode is a superfluous chord of the seventh. The sevenths in tJ ese 
 chords therefore must be prepared and descend one degree. 
 
 Kej' of C. 
 
 m 
 
 I I I 
 
 II 7 
 
 1 
 
 F- 
 
 EM 
 
 liFg 
 
 III 7 
 
 :EEiF-EFSEEFE 
 
 iSSifesFS^EFeElF 
 
 r 
 
 IV 7 
 
 ■4^i=i 
 
 ^Fg 
 
 In the above exercise an example is given of each of the above-mentioned 
 chords of the seventh, prepared and resolved. Of course the preparation and 
 resolution can be effected in several different ways, it being only necessary 
 that a chord should precede which contains the tone which i.s to bo prepared, 
 and in which that tone is a concord, and that a chord should follow which 
 contains a tone on the next degree of the scale below the prepared discord, 
 to which it can resolve. It will be well for the student in all his exercises 
 to slur the discord which requires a preparation to the note which prepares 
 it, as in the above example. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 27 in Close Harmony, with Own Melody. 
 
 Practical Exercise No. 27. 
 
 =:izr:-Fzi=:h[=iF_zFb[:_cz:Lzb[=fi=:r=t=rizFz:t=l 
 
 6 #4 6 ]:f7 6 6 6 
 
 -n-ri-H r— i 
 
 iSiF^FgiFgg 
 I 
 
 "I 
 
140 
 
 SEVENTHS WHICH NEED A PREPARATION. 
 
 ^m^mm^^^^ 
 
 i 6 #6 
 
 4 6 7 
 3 
 
 
 
 4 Si 
 
 « J § # 
 
 =^£FEEEiPEE8EE'=*==EE=^aEE^ 
 
 ^ 5-* 
 
 5 ^ fe5 
 
 EmsMMiMmmmm 
 
 6 J* , 6 6 6 6 #6 7 6 4^6 6 5 
 
 5 ^ ^5 ^5 5 4 ^5 jj: 4 ^5 4 J^ 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 27 in Close Harmony, with Given Melody. 
 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 27. 
 
 I r- r I r- p 
 
 il-illlillitiil§l:l£iii 
 
SEVENTHS WHICH NEED A PREPARATION. 
 
 14. 
 
 
 SSilgig^^EfezJIgll 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 27 in Dispersed Harmony. 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 28 in Close Harmony, with Own Melody. 
 Practical Exkrcise No. 28. 
 
 6 676 66666 
 
 6 7 7 6 7 ^6 ^5 
 
 iiiig^gEiilEpi 
 
 -^EEFl-i"H=EF 
 :=zi«i!EHSEH3 
 
 bs 
 
 11 
 
 g 
 
 ^ 
 
 F^E^"I 
 E=«Ei 
 
 7 7 
 
 I " 
 
 -i 
 
 7 7 
 
 
 a 
 
 be b5 
 
 5 
 
 -^- 
 
 6 6 6 6 ^4 6 6 ^ ^6 6 ^6 ^5 6 
 
 b g ^4 ^ # 
 
 % i "% i % i % i % ' I 
 
142 
 
 SKVENTHS WHICH NEED A PREPARATION. 
 
 6 4 6 5^67 66? 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 28 in Close Harmony, with Given Melcdy. 
 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 28 
 
 
 ie 
 
 iPi 
 
 
 iE.-3£4-I!E*E?EEffiS13;mES'E!L=t 
 
 mmmmmMWM'ii^^ 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 28 in Dispersed Harmony. 
 
143 
 
 CHAPTER XLU. 
 
 CADENCES. 
 
 Whfl a two chords progress in such a manner that the fundamental 
 note ascends a fourth or descends a fifth, the progression is said to 
 form a Cadence. 
 
 When the progression is from a chord of V to the common chord 
 of I, the progression is called a Perfect Cadence. 
 
 When the last chord of the cadence is the common chord of V, 
 the progression is called an Imperfect Cadence. 
 
 When the cadence is formed by other chords, (i. e., when it is 
 neither an imperfect nor a perfect cadence,) the progression is called 
 A Mock Cadence. 
 
 Observe that the perftct cadence is formed by a chord of V, (i. e , eithet 
 the common chord of V or the chord of the seventh of'V,) followed by the 
 common chord of I. 
 
 The final close of a piece of music must end with a perfect ca- 
 dence. 
 
 A strain, or phrase of music, (not the final close,) must end with 
 a perfect or an imperfect cadence. 
 
 Composers occasionally make an exception to this rule, but as a general 
 thing all tunes finally close with a perfect cadence, and all strains or phrases, 
 (for example, the lines of psalm tunes, &.C..) with either a perfect or an im- 
 perfect caderice. Practical Exercises Nos. 24 and 25, do not close with 
 perfect cadeiicts, but it will be readily noticed that the closing chords are 
 "oddities," which it is not desirable often to imitate. Practical Exercise 
 No 21, and some of the other practical exercises, close with a plagal ca- 
 dence, [see page 205,] but most of the practical exercises close with perfect 
 cadences. 
 
 cadences. 
 
 sequences 
 
 I I _ I 
 
 
 -iS=l}&c 
 
 i a 
 
 0^^" 
 
144 
 
 CADENCES. 
 
 ^4 
 
 :r=Fi:l 
 
 &c 
 
 i§Et'EE^§F=F| 
 
 
 
 ^-J 
 
 iii^iph 
 
 &ci 
 
 Ei=siP{-' 
 
 :35i5~iz:z! "1:^1 — l"i 
 
 ©•^:^?^-5— *;i~»— ill 
 
 F^-F^f 
 
 ^ii 
 
 iElgiij^o 
 
 
 
 - &C 
 
 
 &:c 
 
 
 "i — r 
 
 5=J&c 
 
 
 &C 
 
 iiJi^- 
 
 :e3errP3fz 
 
 ■=^ 
 
 ii 
 
 Cannot be done because the seventh 
 cannot resolve. 
 
 ^EEFEEEF 
 
 h^T 
 
 E*: 
 
 £^ 
 
 
 :3li 
 
 Cannot Jie done bei-niise the 
 Huventli cannot resolve. 
 
 iEE: 
 
CADENCF.S. 
 
 145 
 
 The pr'^ceding are cadences (i. e., progressions in which the fundamental 
 note of the second chord is a fifth below or a fourth al)()ve the futidamontal 
 note of ihe first chord) arranged in sequences, [see Chapter XXX.] 7 de- 
 notes a chord of the seventh, and a common chord. The figures 
 over the 7 iind denote the forms. It will be noticed that a clmrd of the 
 seventh in every form goes to a common chord in every form. As it would 
 not sound well to commence a phrase with a chord of the i^eventh. one or 
 more chords are placed at the beginning of each of these sequences, to make 
 a proper commencement to the phrase. The sequence in each instance com- 
 menceswith the chord marked 7. The student should now write these se- 
 quences through the scale, i. e., write each of them like the following, which 
 is the first of the above examples. 
 
 
 I i 
 
 1 — r 
 
 :arr 
 
 ■ "i — P" T" • 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 The above example contains the sequence marked 7 written through 
 the compass of an octave. It will be noticed that it closes with a perfect ca- 
 dence, which makes a satisfactory close to the phrase. 'Jhe student should 
 write all the examples, through an octave, as in the above example, and 
 should also make a satisfactory close, (i. e., a perfect cadence.) to each. In 
 some of the examples it may be necessary to use several chords to form a 
 satisfactory clo.se. In the above, as the la-t chord of the sequence is the 
 chord of V, only one chord was nece.-^sary after the sequence to form a per- 
 fect cadence. The student should practice these sequences in cadences upon 
 the piano, until he can readily play them from memory. 
 
 SEQUENCES IN AVOIDED CADENCES. 
 
 iT=^=5i; 
 
 1 
 
 7 
 
 
 ..-^%r:i 
 
 iil^lipiilf 
 
 ri3] 
 
AVOIDED CADENCES 
 
 miM0-, 
 
 
 ;ee3; 
 
 CHiinot be Jone because the sirTentk 
 Cttuaot revoUe. 
 
 ? \ 
 
 mmm 
 
 i 
 
 S=5li3=SH=its. 
 
 -«^« 
 
 
 ? 
 
 ^i»zzi]:TEr PIT -L.^. 
 
 ^T) 
 
 
 
 :&( 
 
 
 d~B 
 
 ll&c 
 
 Izc: 
 
 :fElEE 
 
 ;#^f&o 
 
 -iFH=i^F 
 
 il: 
 
 iE^E'Efc^E^iEVjt^ 
 
 ? i 
 
 ■4n 
 
 5_. 
 
 
 SisSEHs!^?! 
 
 -mr-^^m 
 
 lEEEjEEnit^c 
 
 
 
 ^Elz- 
 
 Cunnot be done because the aevenlb 
 cannot resolve. 
 
DECEIVING CADENCES. 
 
 141 
 
 I 
 
 .— 1 7 : 
 
 CanBOt be done because the seventh 
 cannot resolve. 
 
 W: 
 
 EEEf 
 
 Cannot be done because the seveutk 
 cannot resolve. 
 
 g=: 
 
 i 
 
 ;EEg=EEJ 
 
 Cannot be done because the seventh 
 caanot resolve. 
 
 i: 
 
 I 
 
 A eadexsce means, properly, a close, eitiier of a tane or plirase. Perfect and 
 imperfect cadences alone produce the definite effect necessary for the end of a strain. 
 Mock cadences produce an effect somewhat similar to that of perfect and imperfect 
 cadences, bat not sufficiently definite to form a close. In the above exercises, 
 although the fundamental note of the second chord of the sequence is a 
 fourth above or a fifth below the fundamental note of the first chord, and 
 is consequently a cadence, the "cadence" or closing effect is avoided by 
 making the second chord also a chord of the seventh, producing an avoided 
 cadence. 7 indicates that the chord is a chord of the seventh. The figure 
 over the 7 indicates the form. The sequence in each instance com- 
 mences with the chord raarked 7, the previous chords being used to make a 
 proper commencement to the phrase. The student should write and practice 
 each of the "Sequences in avoided Cadences," making an appro])riate clos« 
 to each, as he has done with the "Sequences in Cadences." Such of thr 
 exercises as could not be done with four parts, are written with five. 
 
 SEQUENCES IN DECEIVING CADENCES. 
 
 :3dEi:z5:tq=:5 
 
14S 
 
 DECEIVING CADENCES 
 
 iiiiiihi 
 
 1 3 
 V7 VI 
 
 
 
 ^^mm 
 
 Cannot be done becnnse the base and th« 
 seventh iiiake fifih^. 
 
 g:^E=:: 
 
 J-==:j: 
 
 J 
 
 ^^^g"-"T- 
 
 
 V7 VI 
 
 ;g!^p-^f-!» 
 
 V7 VI 
 
 r&c 
 
 f&rC 
 
 V7 VI ^ 
 
 -#-•-» — • ' # — p ' p — J 
 
 V7 VI 
 
 "1 — ^ i — ! — r — r 
 
 3 2 
 
 r&c 
 
 f&c 
 
 7f- — T~ 
 V7 — vr 
 
 Cannot be done because the seTenth 
 raiinut re«olve. 
 
 i=: 
 
 I 
 
 ^7==^ 
 
 V7_ VI 
 
 Cannot be done becnune the seventh 
 uunnot resolve. 
 
 
 
 fcc 
 
AVOIDED DECEIVING CADENCES. 
 
 14Q 
 
 vYhenever \lie common chord of V, or the chord of V7 occurs in a 
 phrasCi, the ear involuntarily expects that the common chord of I will suc- 
 ceed it, i. e., the ear expects a perfect cadence. When the chord of V goes 
 to the chord of VI, this expectation is disappointed, and tlie progression is 
 called a deceiving cadence. The term " deceiving cadence" is also applied 
 to any progression in which the fundamental note ascends a second. The 
 Btuden should write and practice the sequences in deceiving c.idences, a3 
 he has the sequences in cadences, and sequences in avoided cadences. It 
 will be seen that liberties have been taken with the leading note, in order 
 M do the sequences in deceiving cadences in all the forms 
 
 Remark. — Composers seldom use a deceiving cadence in any other than 
 
 .he first form, i. e., V VI. The resolution of the leading note is not con- 
 idered important when five or more parts are used. 
 
 SEQUENCES IN AVOIDED DECEIVING CADENCES- 
 
 
 &c 
 
 -r 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 1 
 
 Vr VI 7 
 
 t^p^: 
 
 'm^ 
 
 Y7 vr? 
 
 &e 
 
 -'r 
 
 
 
 mm 
 
 1 4'^ 
 
 
 ^_ — 
 
 V7 VI7— 1 
 
 EE3EEEI 
 
 Ciuinnt be <Jone hecause the base 
 atul eeventla make filY^. 
 
 0: 
 
 ■E£E^EE: 
 
 [13*] 
 
 iigiijiipf. 
 
 — S=t&C 
 
 V7 VI7 
 
 iE|gig3^< 
 
AVOIDEO DECEIVING CADENCES. 
 
 pt— I ^-J 1 \ 
 
 :&C 
 
 2 3 
 V7 Vl7 
 
 I I I 
 
 S^^ 
 
 :-!■ 
 
 -5:gEpgp 
 
 &c' 
 
 Si3 
 
 3[ 
 
 
 3 1 
 V7 Vl7 
 
 
 ;^-il^=:;l=^ 
 
 3 
 V7 
 
 Yl7 
 
 f^F 
 
 1^ I _ 
 
 }^: 
 
 
 1 -V—\ ^^-T-^ - T / 
 
 :?i::3iz?tiz:izii: 
 
 Cannot be i^ose kecaiHe the aeva b 
 caimut be tlooe. 
 
 iEfE^JEfe|{:^i|^4|fE=; 
 
PASSING NOTES. 151 
 
 The definite effect produced by a cadence, when the second chord is a 
 ojmmon chord, is of course avoided when the second chord is a discord, be- 
 cause as a discord always needs a resohition, it can never be the closing 
 chord of a phrase, but always leaves the impression upon the ear that ano- 
 ther chord is to follow. The student should now write and practice the se- 
 quences in avoided deceiving cadences as he has the other cadences. 
 
 A discord which requires a preparation must be used only on the 
 accented part of a measure, unless the accented part of the measure 
 is also occupied by a discord. 
 
 No 1. No. 3. No. 3. No. 4. 
 
 1. I ) r». L I !^r4^— I !-- ,- ! !- -A-—,'- ' 
 
 Ij l7 l7 Vl7 V7 I, 
 
 In example No. 1, I7, which is a discord which requires a preparation, 
 appears on the unaccented part of the measure, contrary to the rule. This 
 example is therefore wrong. In example No. "2, I7 is on the accented part 
 of the measure, which is correct. In example No. 3, VI7, which is a dis- 
 cord which requires a preparation, is on the unaccented part of the measure, 
 but it is ct)riect. for there is a discord which requires a preparation on the 
 accented part of the same measure. In example No. 4, 1 7 is on the unac- 
 cented part of the measure, but V7, a discord which does not require a pre- 
 paration, is on the accented part of the same measure. Although this is 
 within the requirements of the rule, it does not sound as well as it would if 
 the discord in the first part of the measure was one which required a pre- 
 paration. 
 
 CHAPTER XLin. 
 
 PASSING NOTES. 
 
 Tones which move in the order of the scale are allowed to pro< 
 gress without reference to the chords, and are called Passing Notes 
 
iS^X 
 
 PASSING NOTES. 
 
 J I 
 
 r=m 
 
 ^pif 
 
 
 ^--^ 
 
 In Example No 1 the common chord of C is repeated four times. In the. 
 first measure D in the treble and F in the alto, and in the second measure 
 B and A in the treble, do not belong to the chord of C, but are passing 
 notes. It will be noticed that they move in the order of the scale, i. e., 
 without skipping any tone of the scale. To be more explicit, " moving in 
 the order of the scale" means going from a tone to the next one above or be- 
 low it in the scale. For instance, V to move in the order of the scale must 
 go to IV or VI. 
 
 Every tone used in a musical composition must belong to some 
 chord, and be subject to the treatment appropriate to each chord, 
 except tones which are passing notes. 
 
 No. 2 
 
 «r#*! 
 
 alii 
 
 ="p=r 
 
 The passing notes are unimportant tones, and their oini.ssion from any 
 piece would not materially alter its character. Consecutive fifths must not 
 be made with them, but they are not subjfct to any other rule. 'J'he second 
 chord in Examples Nos. 2 and 3 are precisely alike, but in No. 2 it is the 
 conunon chord of I, B being a passing note, and in No 3 it is the chord of 
 1 7, the seventh (B,) being properly prepared and resolved. Of course, the 
 passiiin; notes often make chords appear differently from their true character, 
 us in Example No. 2, where the second chord is apparently I7, erroneously 
 used, (i. e.. without a preparation,) but in reality is the common chord of I 
 with a pas.sing note, and in Ex;imple No. 4, where the second chord is ap- 
 parently the superfluous common chord ustd vvitliout a preparation, but ir. 
 eality is the common chord of I, G# being a passing note. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 29 in Close Harmony, with Own Melody. 
 
PASSING NOTES. 
 
 151 
 
 Practical Exercise No. 29. 
 
 «#.:-F 
 
 ^E!£E£Ei;^=E;i 
 
 ;t>: 
 
 #4 
 ^2 
 
 .c~r: 
 
 6 4*4 
 4 ^3 
 
 6 6 6 Hr 7 HfG Up 
 
 
 6 6 3 #5 6 
 
 5 #5 6 tf5 
 
 4 6 
 
 667 66 76 6 766 
 
 4 5 5 5 
 
 sJeeeeeeeiIees 
 
 piiF-p:fp=^:-.-r:p=if 
 
 ^EEEaEEEEFEp;?Et 
 
 ^ I " i I « ' ' "^ J 
 
 S3ZE-ttFEE:lEEEI£EFHE?1^3?3l!EEI 
 
 a;#- 
 
 
 5 -^o 
 
 r— rf?Ep^' 
 
 7 7 
 
 fifesSgliili 
 
 7 #4 #6 6 7 #4 ^6 ^6 ^ #2 #4 
 
 5 4 
 
 =E?EEa:EEi:I~±-:EFEgEEEElEEE{EfeEEI 
 
 ^ISHf ^^ 
 
 *"#2 
 
 6 Ji6 
 4 *5 
 
 ! # 
 
 
 5 " ' 
 
 iez:e;EEEE:?EFl 
 
154 PASSING NOTES. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 29 with Given Melody, in Close \Iarmonj. 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 29. 
 
 §2 ri:ipl:p— ^Lr— rz:rzzi_±?:i:::±?zig:i:tr^i:±:s.i 
 
 ►=^--^ 
 
 ^-E~-P=F-?-F^-F=F^ 
 
 rzirzi 
 
 1 — I — I ^ — t »- 
 
 ■^-— — : 
 
 ^-*- «-^-^r^-,- 
 
 gpEg jgEEElEEPgEgg^ 
 
 :»--i=P: 
 
 I r- 
 
 rp=ir:ibr=:btiitbr-=r::tc-rl:r=rl;l-z:p 
 
 liiigigg:|E|ii§{i[f 
 
PEDAL NOTES. 155 
 
 CHAPTER XLIV. 
 
 PEDAL NOTES. 
 
 A tone may remain stationary on the same degret of the scale in 
 two or more consecutive chords, without being subject to the treat- 
 ment prescribed for the different chords. Tones thus treated ar^. 
 tailed Pedal Notes. The other tones of the chord Tiust be treated 
 according to the chord which they form without the pedal note. 
 
 
 IS 
 
 Perhaps a better definition of pedal notes will be to say, that as long as a 
 tone remains stationary it is not subject to any rule. In the first measure of 
 the above example the base is a pedal note. In the second measure the tre- 
 ble is a pedal note. In the third measure the tenor is a pedal note. In the 
 fourth measure the alto is a pedal note. Properly speaking, the pedal note 
 in each measure of the above example is in the second chord. For instance, 
 in the first measure of the example, the first and third chords are common 
 chords of C, and the base notes are members of that chord, but the second 
 chord is the common chord of B, and its base does not belong to that chord, 
 and is of course a pedal note. Observe that the remaining notes of a chord 
 are always treated as if the pedal note was not in the chord. If the pedal 
 note was not in the second chord of the first measure, it would be the common 
 chord of B, and it must consequently be considered as the chord of VIT, and 
 be treated accordingly. Pedal notes, like passing notes, often make a chord 
 appear differently from its true character, as in the second measure of the ex- 
 ample, where the second chord is apparently the chord of the seventh of D, 
 but really the common chord of D with a pedal note. If it was the chord 
 of the seventh of D, it would be the chord of II7, but it will be seen that the 
 seventh does not resolve, and consequently it cannot be thatchoid. In both 
 the third and fourth measures, the second chord is the chord of VII, with a 
 pedal note. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 30 in Close Harmony, with Own Melody 
 
156 
 
 PEDAL NOTES. 
 
 Praoxioal Exercise No. 30- 
 
 Praoxioal Exercise No. «fO- 
 
 76644666 664666 
 
 6 2 • 4 5 4 ii 
 
 6 7 I 7 i ^ ' i i 5 
 
 6 6 ^4 6 ^6 6 6 ^4 6 ^6 7 4 7 
 
 4 3 4 b ^ 8 ^ 
 
 fcb 
 
 =LE?E? 
 
 :::— ridzpzipzi^rrz: c" rzi_(:_r_pi 
 
 ir; h« h-r 6 6 if hr. hfi b'7 6 6 
 
 b b5 be b7 
 
 i 
 
 6 ^ b5 be 
 ^ b ^ 
 
 b b5 b6 b7 6 6 6-^-6 [,6 4 
 
 ^ ^ b^ "^ 
 
 6 be 76676C766164 
 
PEDAL NOTES. 
 
 15: 
 
 iiilifHilsgailli 
 
 7 6 
 
 4 6 4 6 7 
 
 -2 5 3 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 30 in Close Harmony, with Given Melody 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 30. 
 
 K :— I — I — I — hi — r: 
 
 
 
 fE?=^ 
 
 JaE?Efer 
 
 '^^mimmmm 
 
 i-EiEP^^^ 
 
 6^ 
 
 EllTEEEEEEEE=ri!?=E^: 
 
 **=? 
 
 fees 
 
 "HT — I" 
 
 & :^^:^ ^^E ^ 
 
 -\ — i- 
 
 5=s 
 
 l§iP¥ 
 
 
 ..fEr°-'"='=' 
 
 [14] 
 
158 
 
 SUSPENDED CADENCES. 
 
 ;iiHEE3 
 
 B 
 
 CHAPTER XLV. 
 
 SUSPENDED CADENCE 
 
 When at tbe close of a phrase, the chord of V is prolonged after 
 the base of the last chord is taken, it is called a Suspended Ca- 
 dence. 
 
 
 
 miimm 
 
 The second pnrt of the above example is a regular perfect cadence. In 
 the first part of tlie example the cadence, or closing effect, is suspended for 
 two beats, forming a suspended cadence. The Germans call the suspended 
 cadence a " feminine cadence," and the perfect cadence a " masculine ca- 
 dence." In their lanj^uage, consequently, the first part of tlie above exam- 
 ple would be called a feminine cadence, and the last part a masculine ca- 
 dence. In the second chord cithe example, the treble, alto and tenor are, 
 of course, pedal notes. 
 
 Place the Roman figures which denote the chords under each chord ol 
 Practical Exercise No 31, carefully discriminating in reference to passing 
 notes and pedal notes. 
 
 Pr.\ctic.\l Exeucise No. 31 
 I 
 
 
 bj 
 
 i'i 
 
 .''ri 
 
 n 1 . tl 'I 
 
 1^=1- 
 
 iiiiliEgiiPEiEigi^^ 
 
SUSPENDED CADENCES. 
 
 159 
 
 ( 
 
 
 
 
 •I.. 
 
 fi^liiil^lIiiSi^il 
 
 
 6 I ^3 
 
 4 1^ 2 
 
 bs 2 b? 
 
 bii 
 
 bl . 
 
 2 D7 
 
 ^«_i — Cl.r_ r -plf—i — |-I8»— I — l-l-i — ] 
 
 
 '^ • 2 b5 4 b? 4 
 
 -f=;-p- 
 
 ?El^R^?E'r 
 
 lEEEElEE^EziEt 
 
 #rf7 
 
 p:F:r:i=z:5:^S=3:f=p:?^t:'EEfEE^liz5= 
 
 b7 
 
 b7 
 
 b7 
 
 I 6 b4 .6 ^4 f 
 
 bs 2 b5 ^2 bs 
 
 r:f:j£^;ilEEEE3||EEE^I?;EEi:F£EE^] 
 
lea 
 
 TRIPLE DIMINISHED CHORD OF THE SEVENTH- 
 
 6 647 3 63 3 
 
 :E3 riEiEFSE^^3SE^:gE3Z-"#^=^^ 
 
 'i — L# — g, .J_^._«_^_L«:_*_«•^|_a_«!_ 
 ^ r w • .,. .^. ^^. .n I .^. ^_ 
 
 b7 
 
 b? 
 
 6 4 
 4 ii 
 
 m^m^m^Mm: 
 
 
 3-2 3 ^32323 2 
 
 ^-zz-^i 
 
 
 ^sm 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 31 in Dispersed Harmony. 
 
 CHAPTER XLVI. 
 
 TRIPLE DIMINISHED CHORD OF THE SEVENTH, 
 
 The chord of the seventh of ^lY in the minor mode, is com 
 pored of the double diminished common chord with a diminighed 
 •evsnth, and is called the Triple Diminished Chord or the 
 
f RIP .E DIMINISHED CHOllD OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 16] 
 
 Sev^ntii. The seventh in this chord must descend, but does not 
 require a preparation, i. e , it must be treated like the sevenths in 
 the ;hief and diminished chords of the seventh. 
 
 4rIV7 in A minor. ^IVy in E minor. 
 
 ^lY-^ in D minor. 
 
 Write and play 4*1 V 7 in all the keys, and in every form, placing one or 
 more chords after it which will resolve the seventh and form a perfect or im- 
 perfect cadence. 
 
 Eemark. — The first chord in the nineteenth measure of Practical Exer- 
 cise No. 31 is a triple diminished chord of the seventh. 
 
 PI are the Roman figures wl 
 Practical Exercise No. 32. 
 
 ich denote the chords under each chord oi 
 
 Pkactical Exercise No. 39 
 
 
 4 
 
 8 4 
 
 3 2 
 
 —^- 
 
 SErJEEiigE^EEl 
 
 [14*] 
 
TRIPLE DIMINISHED CHORD OF THE SEVr.NTH, 
 
 ? 
 
 * 4 
 
 <#- 
 
 tT-^mz: 
 
 '-'i=W- 
 
 ws mmm 
 
 :n-*: 
 
 M n ^ J t I I J III 
 
 ^«tSE|:FiEra=^:Ep^^HE:-rHE3 
 
 ? 6 
 
 6 4 
 
 4 6 
 
 7 4 
 
 ^i=|E^gPEL^E^^^ 
 
 .t:i==^ 
 
 piE'^fflE^E 
 
 q- 
 
 :-I=±r-|-iid-A<^TrS 
 
 -J «- 
 
 •1 «- 
 
 -i~f~ 
 
 
 ^6 4 7 
 
 ^1 
 
 ;pEsp; 
 
 ;gisiiEi 
 
 )~E:5fE:^Et«^Ef^t^Ei-f«Eji^E!:^EjEl 
 
 4 ^1 ^5 4 4 6 
 
TRIPLE DtHlNISHED CHORD OF THE SEVENTH, 
 
 163 
 
 
 6 6 u 
 
 3 4 6 'ffe 
 
 
 
 # I #*i 6 
 
 '^i 6 I 
 
 ^n^SE^fpiiifig 
 
 -r-fc± 
 
 
 :ig[|f;i?^iiPiS 
 
 ^4 (?3 Mf 
 
 6 n 2 
 
 4 #6 
 
 W 
 
 # 
 
 ^lii^ipipi:p 
 
 Write Practical Exerci,se No. 32 in Dispersed Harracar 
 
iU 
 
 MAJOK DIMINISHED CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 CHAPTER XLVII. 
 
 MAJOR DIMINISHED CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 The cliord of the seventh of IIit4 in the minor mode is composed 
 of a major diminished common chord with a minor seventh, and is 
 called the Major Diminished Chord of the Seventh. The 
 seventh in this cliord must descend, but does not require a prepara- 
 tion, i. e., it must be treated like the sevenths in the chief, dimin- 
 ished and triple diminished chords of the seventh. 
 
 11^47 in A minor 
 
 11^47 in E minor. 
 
 II#47 in D minor. 
 
 114^47 in F minor. 
 
 II#47 in A minor, in al) the forms 
 
 =4 
 
 P 
 
 3 4 
 
 11^17 11:^17 
 
 w- 
 
 
 U#4 7 114^7 II:ffl7 II#l7 114^17 
 
 Write and play the major diminished chord of the serenth in all its forms, 
 m evory kry, placing chords enough after it to resolve the seventh and maka 
 a perfect or imperfect cadence. 
 
 Place (he Roman figures which denote the chords under each chord ol 
 Piaciical Exercise No. 33. 
 
major diminished chords of the serenth. 165 
 
 Practical Exkrcise No. 33. 
 
 :EpEpfE3EECEfE^EE=:EEi'-riEF-S 
 
 ZEE5-P=ET=^=EH-^-TE-^-T-i-^-H 
 
 ^7 t|7 
 
 6 ^4 
 
 ig^pn^pp 
 
 
 ^7 
 
 #5 6 
 
 S # 6 # it6 # 7 #6 ^# # 
 
 F=rztp: 
 
 qirn: 
 
 ^^Esi^EEt:i^E? 
 
 ^6 #5 
 
 l=:?E^p£T#^_= 
 
 ^iiiS 
 
 ;pEa 
 
 6 *^i 
 
 -jm?--^-- 
 
 f=h*F=r-tp=f 
 
MAJOR DIMINISHED CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 ji, 44 4 4646 
 
 #6 3 S » 35264 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 33 in Close Harmony. 
 
 Place the Ptoman ficruros which denote the chords under each chord of 
 Practical Exercise No. 34. 
 
 Practical Exkrcise No. 3^4. 
 
 ;S 
 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 .7 ^7 
 
 7 M 
 
 
 '^EMPMMW^WPB 
 
 b« 
 
 if6 
 
 i i 
 
 mm^E^^mm^^ 
 
MAJOR DIMINISHEJ CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 16t 
 
 
 ^6 
 
 6 bi 
 
 
 tfl ! 
 
 E?Ef3=r='^pgE§ 
 
 
 4^6 6 4 
 
 67 66 5 487 
 
 EE£rE5E.fEE5El=rf*=^=^^l=^ 
 
 s2^^:z:: 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 34 in Close Harmony. 
 
 Remark. — It is often the case that one of the tones belonging to a chord 
 ts omitted, and one of the others doubled in its place. When a pedal note is 
 used wi*h a chord of the seventh, one of the tones belonging to the chord of 
 the seventh must of course be omitted, unless more than four parts are era- 
 ployed. 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 35 in Dispersed Harmony, with Given 
 Melody. 
 
 Practical Exercise No S5 
 
 S^miPileSlil 
 
 i i 7 I *r i ^7 f « 
 
 #4 
 X2 
 
 } 
 
 be §6 ^7 ^5 ^fi ^7 tS7 
 
 be u| ^^ 
 
168 
 
 MAJOR DIMINISHED CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 fsisiiiiiigiiiipiii 
 
 # b I 4 
 
 6 6 6 6 6 7 6 
 
 4 4 
 
 744646474 ■•■ ^7 ^^ 
 
 S2525S 3 ^ ^ 
 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. 35. 
 
 iiig^iiilgiiipi^ 
 
 
 igilppi^ppl^ 
 
 iSgEJgEgilEgPiiiii 
 
 i ^"in rtl!~ 
 
 g#- 
 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 36 in Dispersed Harmony, with Givca 
 Melody. 
 
MAJOR DIMINISHED CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 169 
 
 Practical Exercise No. 3G. 
 
 I I 
 
 v^-r^-P 1 
 
 
 7 4 
 
 '5 
 
 6 b7 
 
 4 7 
 3 
 
 4 7 4 7 
 
 3 3 ^ 
 
 Se^3- 
 
 •-R 
 
 -€^^- 
 
 ^f^^|^?^^fl^ 
 
 7 ^5 ^5 ^7 ^5 ^7 ^5 ^6 
 
 
 fe^,-^^^|=||:|^j^ 
 
 4^6 ^7 b6 b7 
 4r 
 
 be b7 
 
 4 
 
 t>5 
 
 
 b4 7 
 
 3 
 
 "I 'T 
 
 
 • 1 r 
 
 ■0 — O 
 
 :±d 
 
 m 
 
 *-?- 
 
 m 
 
 4 
 
 m 
 
 b 
 
 7 b7 6 ^? ^^ ^^ be 7 
 
 b5 
 
 Melody of Practical Exercise No. HO. 
 
 
 [15] 
 
ro 
 
 PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 irS-^-spirtrzr-zff: 
 
 
 
 Place the Roman figures which denote the chords under each chord o/ 
 practical Exercise No. 37. 
 
 Practical Exercise No. 37. 
 
 1 — »>— I "-— *>-^i — V 
 
 b 
 
 ^5 
 
 
 P- 
 
 "I — r' 
 "i — »" 
 
 ■I*- 
 
 
 :n:7r-i=nziiin- 
 
 
 1 
 
 5-8=] 
 
 
 ^1 
 
 
PRACflCAL EXERCISES. 
 
 in 
 
 iipipSi^?^!||i 
 
 
 en 'A 
 
 # 
 
 as: 
 
 ^\ 
 
 I'xcc: 
 
 
 -H— f*— '- 
 
 £^:|=iEilSEiE!l 
 
 t:^r^ 
 
 •1—1—5 i- 
 
 '^m 
 
 I S T # 6 * § S 7 
 
 --A :F--r=^^zIq?:z:^=i^EE— r— ?— ^ 
 
 
 5 4 7 5 
 
 — B— I ?— S— ?^I-P- 
 
 @i- 
 
 «--•- 
 
 ■S»- S»— •""'-Si 
 
 6 *fl Ji u4 h 5'* 
 
 iE4EE--3E-:^^ 
 
 bii^iriiS: 
 
 
 be ^5 be b? 
 
 H tl 1 
 
 6 ^5 
 
 
m 
 
 PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 R^ 
 
 
 :^P- 
 
 
 ■v^!!p^__iA.'. 
 
 4 a, 7. 
 
 
 Write Practical Exercise No. 38 in Dispersed Harmony, with Givtn 
 Melody. 
 
 Practical Exercise No. 38. 
 f-0 
 
 6 4 6 6 I 6 7 
 
 zz£ibr:zr:_tzz:b;t!r~citc:z::ztE^czlit~!z;Lzizc± 
 
 gzp-zizjip:z:gzqz:^z:--f-zzq:p:^=TrFi=ET 
 i " S I n t ^ § t>7 xe ^« be b7 i 
 
 iSPP§3;}iiliiliiilliiS 
 
 6 
 5 
 
 i 
 
 6 be 
 
 4 4 
 
 f^il..g,=^g:^|i||y 
 
 6 176 
 4 4 
 
RECAPITULATION OF CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH. 173 
 
 7 7 
 
 The melody to each chord of Practical Exercise No. 38 is E|;. i. e. 
 ±=b=C ^—. ._ 
 
 &c 
 
 gL^i^jISigg^i 
 
 END OF PRACTICAL EXERCISES. 
 
 CHAPTER XLVm. 
 
 RECAPITULATION OF CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 Major Scale. 
 — ] 1 1 J « 1 t 
 
 :i: 
 
 « s « 
 
 -A J « 5 
 
 mm 
 
 i7 . Ht ni7 1V7 V7 VI7 TI17 
 
 The chord of I7 in the major mode is a major chord of the 
 seventh. 
 
 The seventh in this chord is a very harsh discord. It requires a prepara- 
 tion, and a resolution to the tone nest below it, and must always resolve at 
 once, i. e., it must not be prolonged into the next chord, a liberty which is 
 sometimes allowed to V7, &c. In other words, the pan which is to sing 
 the tone, which in this chord is the seventh from the fundamental note, must 
 eing the same tone in the chord next before it, (where the tone must be a 
 concord,) and in the chord next after it, must sing the tone on the next de- 
 gree of the scale below. The proper treatment of this chord is explained in 
 Chapter XLI. It is a chord which should always appear on the accented 
 part of the measure, as explained on page 151, and it should never appear 
 on the unaccented part of a measure, unless there is a harsh discord, (i. e., 
 one which requires a preparation,) on the accented part. 
 
 The chord of II7 in the major rr ode is a minor chord of the 
 Beventh. 
 
 [15*] 
 
174 RECAPITULATION OF CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 TTie seventh in this chord is a discord which composers usually coi pider 
 requires a preparation. It is however not so harsh a discurd as the serenth 
 in major chords of the seventh, and it is sometimes used without a prepara- 
 tion. The rule requires that it, like I7, shuuld always appear on the accented 
 part of the measure, but good composers sometimes place it on the unac- 
 cented part, even when there is no discord on tiie accented pait. It rounds 
 perfectly well on the unaccented part of a measure, if there is a discord 
 which does not require a preparation on the accented part The proper 
 treatment of ibis chord is explained in Chapter XLI. 
 
 The chord of III7 in the major mode is a minor chord of the 
 seventh. 
 
 Although this chord is of the same character as IT 7, composers seldom or 
 never take liberties with it, but almost invariably use it strictly according to 
 the directions explained in Chapter XLI. It is also almost invariably placed 
 on the accented part of the measure, unless there is a discord already on 
 that part of the measure, as explained on page 151. 
 
 The chord of IV7 in the major mode is a major chord of the 
 seventh. 
 
 AH the remarks made in reference 10X7 apply also to IV7. It should be par- 
 ticularly notice I th:it very harsh discords, like I7 and IV 7, should never ap- 
 pear on the unaccented parts of a measure, unless there is an equally harsh dis- 
 cord on the accented part. It would not sound well h> place V7, or either of 
 the other sevenths whicli do not require a preparation, on the accented part of 
 the measure, and 1 7 or IV 7 on the unaccented part, because I 7 andIV7 are 
 BO much harsher than any of the sevenths which do not require a prepa- 
 ration, and it can never sound well to place the harshest discord on the un- 
 accented part, and the milder on the accented; but if there are discords on 
 both the accented and unaccented parts of the measure, the harshest .should 
 come first, or at least the discord on the accented part mu^l be as harsh as 
 that on the unaccented part. 
 
 The chord of V7 in the major mode is the chief chord of the 
 seventh. 
 
 This is the mo.st important and most useful of all the chords of the soventh, 
 because it is the least harsh or discordant. It is almost the only chord of the 
 seventh which is found in psalm tUDCS and simple vocal music, and is much 
 more frequently used than any other chord of the seventh, in all varieties of 
 music. The seventh in this chord must resolve, but does not n-jpiire a pre- 
 paration, nor is it required to resolve at once, or in the same part, but it 
 may be proloii<red through several successive chords before it finally resolves, 
 and it may be transferred to another part than that in which it first appears, 
 and resolve in such other part. The proper treatment of this chord is ex- 
 plained in Chapter XXXVII. 
 
#«• 
 
 RECAPlTULATIO^f OF CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH. 175 
 
 The chord of VI7 in the major mode is a minor chord of the 
 r-ev inth. 
 
 All the remarks made in reference to III 7 apply also to VI 7. It should 
 be particularly noticed that the seventh in those chords where it requires a 
 preparation, must always resolve at once, i. e., in the next chord to the one 
 which contains the seventh, the part which sings the seventh must sing the 
 tone next below it. 
 
 The chord of VIT7 in the major mode is a diminished chord of 
 the seventh. 
 
 Composers allow to the seventh in VII 7 all the liberties which are al- 
 lowed to it in V 7, but, so to speak, much more ' grudgingly"; i. e., liberties 
 which are often freely takeh with the seventh in V7 are very seldom takei 
 in VII 7, The proper treatment of this chord is explained in Chapter XL. 
 
 Minor Scale. 
 
 I7 117 n#47 niT 1V7 #iV7 V7 cvi^7) VI7 vn7 (vn^7) 
 
 The chord of I7 in the minor mode is a minor large chord of the 
 seventh. 
 
 This chord is seldom used. The seventh must be prepared and resolve 
 upwards, because it cannot descend without moving a step and a half, and 
 a discord must not move more than a step, (i. e., a major second,) in its 
 resolution. The best way to treat this chord is to resolve the seventh down- 
 wards a half or whole step, thus resolving it out of the key, as in the follow- 
 ing example, where it (I7 iu the key of A minor,) resolves in the first part 
 of the example to V7 in the key of D, and in the second part of the ex- 
 ample to I in the key of D. In the third part of the example it is resolved 
 upwards, the only way in which it can resolve vfithout modulating out of the 
 key. 
 
 
 The chord of II7 in the minor mode is a diminished chord of the 
 seventli 
 
I, '6 RECAPITULATION OF CHORDS OF THE SEVExVTH. 
 
 The seventh in this chord is to be treated precisely like the seventh ii» 
 VII7 in tho major mode. II7 in the minor mode and A'Il7 in the major 
 mode are alike in sound, but not precisely alike in treatment, for VII 7 con- 
 tains a leading note and IT 7 does not. The treatment proper for this chord 
 is explained in Chapter XL. 
 
 Tlie chord of IIfr47 in the minor mode is a major diminished 
 chord of the seventh. 
 
 The seventh in this chord does not require a preparation, and. like the 
 sevenths in all the chords which do not require a preparation, it can resolve 
 in another part, and be prolonged through one or more successive chords be- 
 fore resolving. The proper treatment of this chord is explained in Chapter 
 XLVII. 
 
 The chord of III7 in the minor mode is a superfluons chord of 
 the seventh. 
 
 This is the harshest of the chords of the seventh, because the common 
 chord in it is a very harsh discord, and its seventh is a major seventh, which 
 is also a very harsh discord. All the remarks in relation to the seventh in 
 the chord of 1 7 in the major mode, apply to the seventh in this chord. The 
 proper treatment of this chord is explained in Chapter XLI. 
 
 The chord of IV7 in the minor mode is a minor chord of the 
 seventh. 
 
 All the remarks made in reference to II7 in the major mode apply to this 
 chord. Its proper treatment is explained in Chapter XLI. 
 
 The chord of ^IVv in the minor mode is a triple diminished chord 
 of the seventh. 
 
 The remarks made in reference to 11^47* apply to this chord. Its proper 
 treatment is explained in Chapter XLVI. A singular and pleasing modu- 
 lation can be made with this chord, from the fact that the tones of which it 
 is composed are the same as those which compose the chief chord of the 
 seventh in the key a minor second above the key in which it (^IV7) ap- 
 pears. In the following example the first chord is i^lV ^ in A minor. The 
 second chord is V in A minor. The third chord contains precisely the same 
 tones as the first chord, but making the enharmonic change of D^ to E[i, 
 it becomes V7 in the key of B[), thus forming a pleasing and natural modu- 
 lation to that key. The last part of the example is the same as the first, ex- 
 cept that it modulates to the key of B[y minor, while the first part modulates 
 to the key of B[) major. To become familiar with this modulation the stu- 
 dent ahould write and practice it in all its forms, in all the keys. 
 
RECAPITULATION OF CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH. 177 
 
 The chord of V7 in the minor mode is the chief chord of the 
 s( venth. 
 
 All the remarks made in reference to V7 in the major mode apply to this 
 chord. Its proper treatment is explained in Chapter XXXVII. From the 
 fict that the tones composing this chord also compose the chord of 3*IV7 in 
 the key a minor second behiw, a modulation the reveise of that described in 
 connection with ^IV^ can be made by it. In the following example, the 
 first chord is V7 in the key of C. The second chord is I in the key of C 
 The third chord is precisely like the first, but by the enharmonic change of 
 F to Eff, it becomes ^IVy in B minor, forming a natural and pleasing mo- 
 dulation to that key. The chord of V 7 is precisely the same in both the 
 major and minor scales, and all remarks in relation to it apply equally to 
 'joth modes. To become familiar with this modulation, the student should 
 XTite and practice it, in all its forms, in all the keys. 
 
 The chord of ¥#4? in the minor mode is a major large chord ot 
 the seventh. 
 
 If :ii=IV is employed in classifying the tones of the minor scale, as if it was 
 an integral member of that scale, [see pages 96 and 10:J,] such a chord as 
 y^4i is possible, although the author has no recollection of ever having 
 seen one in any musical composition. If used, its seventh should be treated 
 like the seventh in I7 in the minor mode, i. e., it must be prepared, and re- 
 solve upwards, or downwards out of the key. 
 
 The chord of VI7 in the minor mode is a major chord of the 
 seventh. 
 
 All the remarks made in reference to I7 in the major mode apply to this 
 chord. Its proper treatment is explained in Chapter XLI. 
 
 The chord of VII7 in the minor mode is a double diminished 
 thord of the seventh. 
 
 This is one of the most singular and useful chords in the whole range of 
 music. It is explained at length in Chapter XXXIX. 
 
178 CHORDS OF THE NINTH. 
 
 The chord of Yll^i^ in the minor mode is a minor diminished 
 chord of the seventh. 
 
 As is remarked in reference to V:i*47, such a chord as VII#4- is possi- 
 ble, although seldom or never used. If used, its seventh must be treated 
 like the seventh in the double diminished chord of the seventh. It will be 
 noticed that there are three tones in it which have a fixed resolution, viz., 
 the fundamental note, which is the leading note, (and must ascend,) the 
 fifth, which is the j-harp fourth, (and must ascend,) and the seventh. 
 
 Concluding Remarks on Chords of the Seventh. — If the 
 student has worked out all the practical exercises correctly, he is 
 now familiar with all the common chords and all the chords of the 
 seventh which can possibly occur in any kind of music. He should 
 now analyze music of different kinds, and notice how different 
 authors use the chords of the seventh, proceeding in reference to 
 chords of the seventh precisely as directed in reference to common 
 chords, on page 106. As there directed, he should also compose 
 pieces himself, using now chords of the seventh as well as common 
 chords 
 
 ENO '>P TREATISE ON CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH. 
 
 CHAPTER XLIX. 
 
 CHORDS OF THE NINTH. 
 
 A chord composed of a common chord, with a tone which is u 
 ninth from the fundamental note added to it, is called a Chord cr 
 THE Ninth. 
 
 Chords of the Ninth in the Major Mode. 
 
 II» Illi iv» v» vi» VII» 
 
CHORDS OF THE NINTH. 179 
 
 Chords of the Ninth in the Minor Mode. 
 
 
 l9 II9 11^49 III9 IV9 #IV9 V9 VI9 VII9 
 
 The common chord which forms a part of each chord of the 
 aiinth, must be treated as it would be if it stood alone, i, e., as if 
 he ninth was not added to it. 
 
 All the remarks in relation to the common chords, in Chapter XXXVI, ap- 
 ply to chords of the ninth, and all other chords, as well as to the chords of the 
 eevfloth. 
 
 The ninth in the chord of Yg in both the major and minor modes, 
 is n discord of the second class. It must resolve by descending one 
 degree, but does not require a prepsuration, 
 
 V9 is somewhat like V7, but no such liberties are allowed the ninth as are 
 allowed the seventh in V7. It must resolve at once, and in the same part in 
 which it first makes its appearance. 
 
 All the chords of the ninth, except Vg^ are discords of the third 
 class. The ninths must be prepared, and descend one degree. 
 
 The ninths in all the chords of the ninth, must be treated precisely like the 
 seventh in Jhe chord of I7 in the major mode, and all the remarks made in re- 
 ference to I7, apply te all the ninths except V9. 
 
 Observe that all ninths must resolve by descending. The ninth in VI9 in 
 the minor mode must consequently resolve out of the key, for if it descends at 
 all in the key, it must descend a step and a half, and no discord in resolving 
 oaust descend more than a major second. [See remarks in relation to 1 7 in the 
 amor mode, page 175.] 
 
 When the seventh of the minor scale is a discord, if it is a fifth 
 'as in III,) or a seventh (as in I7J it may resolve by ascending 
 Dut if it is any other discord, (a ninth, eleventh, <fcc.} it mu it re- 
 julve by descending. 
 
 Ninths must not be prepared and resolve in octares. 
 
190 
 
 CHORDS OF THE NINTH 
 
 s 
 
 
 In tl ^ example D is the ninth. In the first chord the treble and alto are m 
 octavea D in the alto goes to C, while D in the treble remains and forms the 
 ninth, which immediately resolves to C. Such a progression is considered the 
 same as consecutive octaves, because the ear would naturally expect that the 
 treble is going to C, and the ninth merely makes a suspension of the progre^ion 
 which the ear expects. 
 
 PvEMARK. — The ninth (with the exception of V9,) and all the chords w^hicb 
 remain to be explained, require precisely the treatment which was given to 
 1 7 in the major mude. If the student has worked out the practical exercises, he 
 is now perfectly familiar with the proper treatment for all kinds of chords, and 
 particular practice upon the ninths, elevenths, &-c., is unnecessary. For the 
 sake of practice, the student can, if he chooses, work out a set of sequences in 
 avoided cadences, like those explained on page 147, only making the second 
 chord a chord of the ninth instead of a chord of the seventh, as directed in the 
 following table. It will be noticed that in the avoided cadences, on pages 145 
 and 146, the third of the first chord in the sequence is continued into the second 
 chord, and in that chord becomes the seventh, so that the cadence is said to be 
 "avoided by retaining the third." In the avoided, cadences denoted in the 
 table, the fifth of the first chord of the sequence will become the ninth in the 
 Becond chord, consequently in these exercises the cadence will be " avoided by 
 retaining the fifth." 
 
 1 1 1 2 13 114 1 
 
 7 9]7 97 97 9 
 
 1 2 1 2 2 3 2 14 2 
 
 797979|79 
 
 1 3 1 2 sis 314 S 
 
 7 9J7 9|7 9|7 9 
 
 1 5 2 5 1 3 5 14 5 
 
 7 9l7 9[7 97 9 
 
 When the fundamental note forms the base of a chord, the cbonl 
 ts said to be in the fust form. 
 
CHORDS Uf THE NINTH. 
 
 18 ^. 
 
 When the third forms the base of a chord, the chord is said to be 
 in the seyynd form. 
 
 When the fifth forms the base of a chord, the chord is said to be 
 tn the third form. 
 
 When the seventh forms the base of a chord, the chord is said to 
 hi in i\\e fourth form. 
 
 When the ninth forms the base of a chord, the chord is said to 
 be in tha fifth form^ 
 
 When the eleventh forms the base of a chord, the chord is said 
 to be in the sixth form. 
 
 When the thirteenth forms the base of a chord, the chord is said 
 to be in the seventh form. 
 
 As the chord of the ninth has no seventh in it, it of course has no fourth 
 form. Several of the progressions indicated in the table cannot be done in four 
 parts, but can be in five. The following are the first and second progression? 
 denoted in the table, the first being in four parts and the second in five. With 
 the aid of thetje examples, and the explanations on page 147, it is presumed the 
 gtudent will find no di^culty in working out all the progressions denoted by the 
 table. 
 
 In the sequences in avoided deceiving cadences, explained on page 151, it will 
 be noticed that the fundamental note of the first chord of the sequence is retained, 
 and becomes the seventh of the second chord. By retaining the third instead of 
 the fundamental note, the second chord will be a chord of the ninth. If the student 
 chooses, he can write a set of avoided deceiving cadences, similar to those oa 
 pages 149 and 150, making the second chord a chord of the ninth. 
 
 
 CHAPTER L. 
 
 CHORDS OF THE ELEVENTH. 
 
 A chord composed of a common chord, with a tone which is an 
 tleventh from the fundamental note added to it, is called ? Chord 
 ©F THE Eleventh. 
 [16] 
 
.8S 
 
 CHORDS OF THE ELEVENTH. 
 
 Chorda of the Eleventh in the Major Mode. 
 
 1# : 
 
 i 
 
 iiii niii ivn vn viij villi 
 
 Chords of the Eleventh in the Minor Mode. 
 
 * 1 1 III — •izz~\' 
 
 111 nu 11^411 iiiii ivii #iviivii VIll villi 
 
 The elevenths in every chord must be prepared, and reso}v» bj 
 descending one degree. 
 
 As is remarived in respect to the chords of the ninth, after the thorough prac- 
 tice which die student ha.s had in working out the practical exercises, particubr 
 practice is hardlj necessary on chords of the ninth, eleventh, &,c., which require 
 JQ everj case the same treatment as those chords of the seventh which re- 
 quire a preparation. If the student chooses, however, he can wuik out tb.» 
 fi>Uowin^. 
 
 1 1 
 
 V7 VIll 
 
 1 . 
 
 V7 VIll 
 
 V7 VIll 
 
 1 6 
 V7 VIll 
 
 2 1 1 
 
 V7 VIllj 
 
 V7 VIll 
 
 2 3 
 V7 VIll 
 
 2 6 
 V7 VIll 
 
 3 1 1 
 V7 VIllj 
 
 3 2 
 V7 VIll 
 
 3 3 
 V7 VIll 
 
 3 6 
 V7 VIll 
 
 4 1 1 
 
 V7 Tlii\ 
 
 4 2 
 V7 VIll 
 
 4 S 
 V7 VIll 
 
 4 6 
 V7 VIll 
 
 In avoided deceiving cadences, as represented on pages 149 and 15 0, if tli« 
 fifth is retained the second chord of the sequence will be a chord of the eleventh. 
 
 Some of the progressions denoted in the talile cannot bo done in fnir parts, 
 but can in five. The following are the first and third progrestaons denoted ii 
 tho tables, the first being in four and the other in five parts. 
 
CHORDS OF THE ELEVENTH. 
 
 IS^i 
 
 The figures V and VI are used to indicate deceiving cadences, because th« 
 fundamental note of the second chord must be one degree higher than that o 
 the first chord. As the chords of V and VI will of course occur in the se- 
 quence if it is continued through an octave, (as described on page 145,) it is 
 not necessary that the first chords should actually be those of V and VI. In 
 simple music, however, deceiving cadences are seldom made with any other 
 chords than V and VI. 
 
 V7 VIll 
 
 &c 
 
 The chord of the eleventh complete is a very harsh discord, but with the 
 third omitted it is almost as mild a discord as the chord of V7, consequently 
 it is almost invariably used without the third, but with the fundamental n.^e 
 doubled instead. 
 
 Chords of the Eleventh in the Major Mode, as usually used. 
 
 — «- 
 
 -m — 
 
 tA 
 
 •- 
 
 ^==?==r=t= 
 
 iliii 
 
 111 iiii mil ivii vii vui V117 
 
 Chords of the Eleventh in the Minor Mode, as usually used 
 
 
 J=-:r-fS3^=p=f 
 
 
 lUi mil ivii vii VIll vim 
 
 Sharp four can be used as a seventh, but not as any other discord, conse- 
 quently those chords where it would form the ninth or eleventh are not used. 
 In the chord of IV j | in the minor mode, the eleventh must of course re- 
 solve out of the key, as explained on page 175. 
 
 The chord of the eleventh, used without the third, is very freq"e»:<dy em- 
 ployed in sacred music. Some fancy it produces a peculiarly sacred efect, 
 and call it the '' Ecclesiastical Discord." 
 
184 
 
 CHORDS OF THE THIRTEENTH. 
 
 CHAPTER LI. 
 
 CHORDS OF THE THIRTEENTH. 
 
 A choi i composed of a common chord, with a tone which is a 
 {hirteenth from the fundamental note added to it, is called a Choi.d 
 DF THE Thirteenth. 
 
 Chords of the Thirteenth in the Major Mode. 
 
 i 
 
 -F 
 
 .=^p: 
 
 
 r- f- P 
 
 HE 
 
 Il3 
 
 IIl3 III13 IY13 Vi3 VI13 vni3 
 
 Chords oC the Thirteenth in the Minor Mode. 
 
 :^=!^ 
 
 - ■?: 
 
 fei 
 
 M 
 
 
 Il3 1113 11:^13 nii3 IV13 #IVi3 Vi3 VI13 VII13 
 
 i 
 
 The thirteenth in every chord of the thirteenth must be prepared, 
 and resolve by descending one degree. 
 
 The tones in a chord of the thirteenth are precisely the same a>< in the 
 .nords of the seventh. On this account chords of the thirteentli are s il- 
 dom or never used. 
 
 m 
 
 3Ea3fEfeE; 
 
 - — J. « ^- 
 
 -S- -0- -0- 
 
 —0— 
 
 smsm^mm 
 
 IV 
 
 3 3 
 
 Il3 I 
 
 4 2 
 VI7 II 
 
RECAPITULATION OF CHORDS. 186 
 
 It will Je noticed that the second chord in each part of the preceding ex- 
 ample is composed of the letters A, C, E, G. In the first part of the exam- 
 ple it is a chord of the thirteenth, and A is the discord. In the second part 
 of the example it is a chord of the seventh, and G is the discord. 
 
 CHAPTER LTI. 
 
 RECAPITULATION OF CHORDS. 
 
 -m — 
 -« — 
 
 
 — « 
 
 — «- 
 .0. 
 
 -A 1 « «— — « «- m l-l- 
 
 -J « » 0, m m m u 
 
 The first chord in the above example contains all the tones of the scale, 
 and is the source from which all chords are derived. The second note is 
 the lowe.st note of the first chord standing alone. To write music in one 
 part only, no classification (f chords is needed, nor are any of the rules of 
 harmony necessary fur one part compositions. The third of the above ex- 
 amples embraces the two lower notes of the first chord. To write music in 
 two parts, care must be taken to avoid consecutive octaves and fifths, but no 
 classification in chords is necssary. The fourth of the above examples em- 
 braces the three lowest tones of the first chord. Great variety can be made 
 with three tones, and consequently for three or moie part compositions a 
 classification of tones into choids is necessary. Thise three tones form a 
 common chord. The fifth of the above examples embrace the f 'ur lower 
 tones of the first choid, or in other words, the comtiiou cliord part of the 
 first chord, with a seventh added, forming a chord of the seventh. The 
 si.Kth of the above examples embraces the first, second, third and fifth tones of 
 the first chord, or in other words, the common chord part of the first chord, 
 with a ninth added, forming a chord of the ninth. The seventh of the above 
 examples embraces the fir.st, second, third and sixth tones of the first chord, 
 or in other words, the common chord part of the first chord, with an eleventh 
 added, forming a chord of the eleventh. The eighth of the above examples 
 embraces the first, second third and seventh tones of the first chord, or in 
 other words, the common chord part of the first churd, with a thirteenth' 
 added, forming a chord of the thirteenth. 
 
 Rkmark. — The student should now compose tunes and pieces, employing 
 chords of the ninth, &.C., as well as chords of the seventh; and common 
 chords. He should also analyze music, according to the directions on page 
 10(>, noticing how every common chord, chord of the seventh, chord of th« 
 ninth, &.c., is used. 
 
 [16»] 
 
166 CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH ANC MINTn. 
 
 CHAPTER LIII. 
 
 CHOUDS CONTAINING MORE THAN ONE DISCORD. 
 
 A s hord composed of a common chord, with tones which are a 
 seventh and a ninth from the fundamental note added to it, is called 
 a Chord of thk Seventh and Ninth. 
 
 Chords of the Seventh and Ninth in the Major Mode. 
 
 ^ -•- -5- ^•- 
 
 « — s — s — t — »— 
 
 ^ I 1 1 
 
 I"7,9 IV7,9 V7^9 Vl^^g Vll-^g 
 
 Chords of the Seventh and Ninth in the Minor Mode. 
 
 l7,9 "7,9 "^-17,9 nr7,9 ^"^1,0 ^^"^1,9 "^ 1,9 "^7,9 ^"7,9 
 
 The student does not need any further instructions to be able to use any 
 chord correctly. Any or all of the discords may be combined in one chorJ, 
 but each must be treated just as ii would be if it stood alone. For example, 
 if the seventh and ninth are u.sed in a chord, the seventh must be treated aa 
 if the chord was a chord of the seventh, and the ninth as if the chord was a 
 chord of the ninth. If the student has time, it may be well for him to study 
 this chapter, and work out the exercises, but it is not absolutely necessary. 
 
 A discord may become a harsher discord without resolving. 
 
 I 
 
 ->J I 
 
 VII V7 I V117 I7 IV 1117 I9 I ni9 111 I 
 
 In the first measure of the above example the dimini.shed fifth in the firsi 
 chord becomes the seventh in the second chord before it resolves. In the 
 
CHORDO OF THE SEVENTH AND NINTH. 
 
 187 
 
 lecond n.easure, the seventh in the first chord, which is a discord of the 
 lecond class, becomes a discord of thfe third class in the second chord, before 
 it resolvjs. In the third measure, the seventh in the first chord becomes the 
 ninth in the second chord, before it resolves. This example is so written for 
 the sake of illustration ; it is not grammatically correct, for consecutive fifths 
 occur in it In the fourth measure, the ninth in the first chord becomes the 
 eleventh in the second chord, before resolving. It will be seen by these ex- 
 amples, that a discord may become any harsher discord before resolving, but 
 not the reverse. A diminished fifth may, therefore, become a seventh, ninth, 
 eleventh or thirteenth. A seventh may become a ninth, eleventh or thir- 
 teenth ; but cannot become a fifth. A ninth may become an eleventh or 
 a thirteenth, but cannot ibecome a seventh or a fifth. An eleventh can be- 
 come a thirteenth, but cannot become a ninth, a seventh or a fifth. 
 
 In the avoided cadences, on page 145, we have seen that retaining the 
 third of the fir^t chord of the sequence makes a chord of the seventh of the 
 second chord ; and on page 181, that retaining the fifth of the first chord 
 makes a chord of the ninth of the second chord. The following table de- 
 notes progressions in avoided cadences in which both the third and the fifth 
 are retained, i. e., in which the first chord is a chord of the seventh, and the 
 second chord a chord of the seventh and ninth, or, in other words, like the 
 avoided cadences on pages 145 and 181, united. Of course it requires five 
 parts to form a complete chord of the seventh and ninth. Some of the pro. 
 gressions denoted in the table cannot be done in five parts, but can be in 
 six parts. 
 
 1 1 
 
 1 ( 
 
 1 2 1 1 3 11 4 
 
 7 7,9 1 7 7,9 7 7,9 
 
 7 7^,9 
 
 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 8 2 4 
 
 7 7,"9 1 7 7,"9 1 7 7,"9 7 7,9 
 
 2 5 
 
 7 7,9 
 
 3 1 1 3 2 1 3 3 1 3 4 
 
 7 7r9 1 7 779 1 7 7,9 7 7,9 
 
 3 5 
 
 7 7,"9 
 
 4 1 ! 4 2 1 4 3 4 4 
 
 7 779 7 7,-9 1 7 7,9 7 779 
 
 4 5 
 
 7 7,"9 
 
 • -9- -0- -2 
 
 
188 ?HORnS OF THE SEVENTH AND ^INTH. 
 
 The above are examples of the first and second progressions, denoted in 
 the able, the first being in five parts, and the second in six. 
 
 When the chord of the seventh and ninth is usea in a four part 
 composition, either the third or the fifth of the chord must be 
 omitted. 
 
 Chord of 7,9 with the Chord of 7,9 A'ith the 
 
 third omitted. fifth omitted 
 
 As the chord of the seventh and ninth is composed of five tones, of course 
 one which properly belongs to the chord must be omitted in a four part com- 
 position. It will readily be seen that the third or the fifth are the only tones 
 which can be omitted, without destroying the character of the chord. 
 
 Avoided deceivincr cadences (see page 149,) can be made, with a chord of 
 the seventh and ninth for the second chord of the sequence, by retaining the 
 fundamental note and the third for the first chord, and making them become 
 the seventh and ninth of the second chord, as in the following example. If 
 he student wishes for more practice upon the chord of the seventh and ninth 
 ne can work out this variety of avoided deceiving cadences through all the 
 forms. It must be noticed that the letters V and VI are used here as on 
 page 183, to denote the movement peculiar to a deceiving cadence, and not 
 to denote the chords of five and six, although if the exercise is continued 
 through the octave, as directed on page 145, those chords will of course 
 occur in their turns. In the deceiving cadences which commence on pages 
 147 and 149, the sequence is made to commence in each instance with the 
 chords of five and six, and it is in fact seldom the case that a deceiving ca- 
 dence is made with any other chords than V and VI, but in these examples 
 those letters are used to denote a progression in which the fundamental note 
 of the second chord is a degree above that of the first, and not to denote the 
 chord of V or VI. 
 
 1 1 1^2^ 
 
CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH AND ELEVENTH. 189 
 
 The student should now compose tunes and pieces, introducing the chord ot 
 the seventh and ninth. 
 
 A chord composed of a common chord, with tones which are a 
 seventh and an eleventh fvjom. the fundamental note added to it, is 
 sailed a Chord of the Seventh and Eleventh. 
 
 Chords of the Seventh and Eleventh in the Major Mode. 
 
 i J Jr 4 t: t t 
 
 m S m 2 m 
 
 \ « 2 « 2 
 
 -^i 
 
 J: # 1 1 p 
 
 l7,ll 117,11 IIl7,i, IV7,n V7,,i Vl7,ii VIl7,ii 
 Chords of the Seventh and Eleventh in the Minor Mode. 
 
 -A — J — J — « — m — m~S 
 
 
 -»■ 
 
 ^» — i — i— #S — i — i— #» 
 
 h,n n7.11 n#47^ii 1117,11 iV7,ii #iV7,ii V7,ii vi7,ii vn,^!! 
 
 The remarks in reference to the use of the chord of the seventh and ninth, ap- 
 ply to the use of the chord of the seventh and eleventh. In avoided deceiving 
 •cadences, if the fundamental note and the fifth of the first chord of the sequence 
 - are retained, they will become the seventh and the eleventh in the second chord. 
 The student can write out such avoided deceiving cadences, in all the forms, as 
 an exercise in the use of the chord of the seventh and eleventh. The following 
 are the first and second progressions of such a set of cadences. 
 
 j?rr; 
 
 t^: 
 
 -f- f — !•- I — I* 
 
 The chord of the seventh and eleventh is composed of five tones, and can only 
 be used complete in five parts. When used in a four part composition the third 
 of the chord must be omitted. 
 
190 
 
 CHORDS OF THE NINTH AND ELEVENTH. 
 
 Chord of the seventh and eleventh 
 with the third omitted. 
 
 I. will be seen that the third or the fifth are the only tones which can be 
 omit.ed without altering the character of the chord. In a chord containing the 
 eleventh, it is always better to omit the third. 
 
 The student should now compose tunes and pieces, introducing the chord of 
 the seventh and eleventh. 
 
 A chord composed of a common chord, with tones which are a 
 ninth and an eleventh from the fundamental note added to it, u 
 called a Chord of the Ninth and Eleventh. 
 
 Chords of the Ninth and Eleventh in the Major Mode. 
 
 _J__J J^ * * * ? 
 
 a==i==S=: 
 
 
 
 T- 
 
 liEpl 
 
 19,11 119,11 i"9,ii i'^9,ii '^g.ii ^^19,11 ^11 
 
 Chords of the Ninth and Eleventh in the Minor Mode. 
 
 It "l~^i~~s~^ "^' — ^~ ' — 
 
 19,11 "9,11 "#19.11 i"r,_u ivg^ii #1^9 11 V911 vr^ii vir.yi 
 
 In avoided deceiving cndcncoi^, if the third .ind fifth of the first chord are re- 
 tained, they will become the ninth and eleventh in the .'^ccond chord. The stu- 
 dent can write out such avoided deceiving cadences, in all the forms, as an ex- 
 ercise in the use of the chord of the ninth and eleventh. The following are the 
 first and second progressions of such a set of cadences, 
 
CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH, NINTH AND ELEVENTH. 
 
 191 
 
 
 fr" 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 -p- 
 
 i^i 
 
 T' 
 
 -T&c 
 
 The chord of the ninth and eleventh is composed of five tones, and can only 
 be used complete in a composition of five parts. In a four part composition th« 
 third must be omitted. 
 
 Chord of the ninth and eleventh 
 with the third omitted. 
 I 
 
 It will be seen that the third or the fifth are the only tones which can be 
 omitted without altering the character of the chord. In a chord containing an 
 eleventh it is always better to omit the third. 
 
 The student should now compose tunes and pieces, introducing the chord 
 of the ninth and eleventh. 
 
 A ihord composed of a common chord, Avith tones which are a 
 seventh, ninth and eleventh from the fundamental note added to it 
 is cal.ed a Chord of the Seventh, Ninth and Eleventh. 
 
 Chords of the Seventh, Ninth and Eleventh in the Major Mode. 
 
 I 
 -«- 
 
 — m- 
 — m- 
 — m- 
 — m- 
 — •- 
 
 t 
 
 j: — #— — •■ 1 1 
 
 ^7,9,11 "7,9,11 ni7^9,ii IV7^9,11 V7^9_ii VI7 9 j^ 
 
 ^^"7,9,11 
 
 Chords of the Seventh, Ninth and Eleventh in the Minor Mode. 
 
 I j \ -0- 
 
 j ! J ; — ^« — m i — ig: — -»: 
 
 ^t — s — s — #« 
 
 — »»l — ■ i,- 
 
 __5j — J. 
 
 i* 
 
 
 m 
 
 '7,9,11 "7,9,11 "#47^9,11 "17,9,11 ^l,^,n 4frV7,R,ll ^7,9,11 Vl7^9^ii '^^Ifi^W 
 
192 
 
 CHORDS OF THE SEVENTH, NINTH AND ELEVENTH. 
 
 In avoided deceiving cadences, if the fundamental note, third and fifth of the 
 first chord are retained, they will become a seventh, ninth and eleventh in the 
 next chord. The student can work out such a set of sequences, as an exercise 
 in the chord of the seventh, ninth and eleventh. The following are the first, 
 Becond and third of such a set of sequences. 
 
 -] — ^~~r : 
 
 -S— » 
 
 
 _i — -p 
 
 V7 vi7Q,n 
 
 iflEf" 
 
 
 i^ -i- • d * -i- -•- 
 
 1 3 
 
 V7 Vl7,9,ii 
 
 
 W- 
 
 As 'the chord of the seventh, ninth and eleventh is composed of six tones, ft 
 can only be used complete in compositions of six parts. When used in a com- 
 position of four parts, the third and fifth must be omitted. 
 
 Chord of the seventh, ninth and eleventh, 
 with the third and fifth omitted 
 
 The student should now compose tunes and pieces, introdttcing chords of tlw 
 •erenth, ninth and eleventh. 
 
CONCLUDING REMARKS ON DISCORDS. 193 
 
 CHAPTER LIV. 
 
 CONCLUDING REMARKS ON DISCORDS. 
 
 When two or more discords are included in a chord, they may 
 s«*«olve one at a time, provided the sharper resolves first. 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 — 1 — 
 
 1 
 
 — « — 
 
 -J— 
 
 —m- 
 
 -T- 
 
 « — 
 
 -« — 
 
 — « — 
 
 -0- 
 
 
 i 
 
 — 1 — 
 
 =1- 
 
 — *! — 
 
 — n- 
 
 
 
 m — 
 -0- 
 
 — « — 
 
 -9- 
 
 
 =^ 
 
 «—— « m- 
 
 m « «- 
 
 -9- -9- -0- 
 
 17.11 
 
 In the first measure of the above example, the first chord is a chord of the 
 seventh and ninth. The ninth resolves first and then the seventh. In the 
 second measure, the first chord is a chord of the seventh and eleventh. The 
 eleventh resolves first and then the seventh. In the third measure, the first 
 chord is a chord of the ninth and eleventh. The eleventh resolves first and then 
 the ninth. In the fourth measure, the first chord is a chord of the seventh, 
 ninth and eleventh. The eleventh resolves first, then the ninth, and then the 
 seventh. The last measure is wrong, because the seventh resolves before the 
 ninth, which is the sharper discord of the two. 
 
 The above chord embraces all the tones of the scale, and in accordance witli 
 the terms which have been applied to the other chords, its name would be 
 chord of the seventh, ninth, eleventh and thirteenth. The different combinationg 
 m which the tones of this chord (in whole or in part,) can be placed, repeated 
 on each tone of the major and minor scale, (i. e., with each tone of the major 
 and minor scale for the fundamental note,) form all the chords 
 [17] 
 
194 CONCLUDING REMARKS ON DISCORDS. 
 
 I I II III 
 
 I -«- I \ -m- I -m- -m- i -0t- -«- 
 
 — i' — ^ — J— H-- m — I— « — #1 « 0. «- 
 
 « — 1 — \ — V-m—m—m -n — i 1 — « « 1 « — 1-|- 
 
 m-0-m—m- #1— •-•! — «-*--« — m — « « — ■-■- 
 
 I ^7 I'J ^11 ^3 l7,0 17,11 l7,13 ^9,11 ^9,13^1,13 ^7,9,nl7,ll,13^t,ll,1.3 ^7,9,11:13 
 
 In the above example the tones of the chord of the seventh, ninth, eleventh 
 and thirteenth, are combined in every possible way, with a ct>mplete common 
 chord, and with I of the major sca'e as the fundamental note. These com- 
 binations, repeated on each tone of the major and minor scales, (i. e., with 
 each tone of both scales as t})e fundamental note,) form all the chords possi- 
 ble in music. Some other (apparent) varieties can be formed by omitting 
 the third or fifth, or both, of the common chord, but the omission of those 
 tones of the conmion chord makes no essential change in the character of a 
 discord, (as has been seen in Chapter LTf,) and consequently such (appa- 
 rent) varieties cannot be considered as different chords. For example, the 
 chord of the seventh and ninth with the third omitted, as on page 188, can- 
 not be considered as a different chord from the chord of the seventh and ninth 
 complete, because the omission of the third does not alter the character of the 
 chord. 
 
 The student is already familiar with all the chords contained in the above 
 example, except those combinations which are formed with the thirteenth, 
 which are so seldom u.sed that it has seemed hardly de^irable to write a 
 course of exercises upon them. 
 
 Remark on Pedal Notks. — In addition to the explanation in reference 
 to pedal notes, on page 155, it is necessary to explain that the tone which 
 is the pedal note must be a concord when it first appears on the degree ol 
 the staff on which it is to be a pedal note, and mast also be a coiKord when 
 it leaves that degree of the staff. 
 
 In the first part of the above example the base is a pedal note. When it 
 first appears on the degree of the staff on which it is to be a pedal note, it 19 
 the fundamental note of the common chord of I, which is a concord. In the 
 last chord in which it appears on that degree of the staff, it is also the funda- 
 mental note of the common chord of 1. In the second and third parts of the 
 example, the same base note is a pedal note, but incorrectly used, because 
 K the second part of the example it is not a concord in the chord in which 
 
APPOGGIATURAS AND PASSING NOTES. 195 
 
 (t first appears as a pedal note, and in the third part of the example it is not 
 a concord in the last chord in which it appears as a pedal note. By " con- 
 cord"' is meant, of course, some tone in a chord which is not a discord, 
 as, for example, the fundamental note, third or fifth of any chord, (not the 
 diminished or superfluous fifth, however.) 
 
 The student should now compose tunes and pieces, introducing all the ra- 
 rieties of chords which are possible in music 
 
 ENI> OF TREATISE ON CHORDS. 
 
 CHAPTER LV, 
 
 APPOGGIATURAS, PASSING NOTES, 
 
 A tone placed wpon the accented part of a raeasure, without 
 ■^ferenoe to th« chords, is called an Appoggiatura, 
 It is right to skip to, but not from an appoggiatura, 
 
 Appoggiatnras and passing notes are a^ike in every respect, except that it 
 is allowed to skip to an appoggiatura, while a passing note must be approached 
 -arid left without skips. An appoggiatura may he appropriately described as 
 an aoc«ited passing note. Although appoggiaturas are explained as being 
 allowed only on the accented part of the measure, composers frequently use 
 ahem as the first of a group of two or more notes, whether those notes arc 
 en the accented part of a measure or not. 
 
 In the first meastn-e of the ahove example,, the fifst and third quarter notes 
 are appoggiaturas. As it is a quadruple measure, and these quarter notes 
 ate on the "first ant! third parts of the measure, the appoggiaturas are appro][ri- 
 ately used on the accented parts of the measure. In the second measure, 
 the first o^ each group of eighth notes is an appoggiatura. Although two of 
 them are on unaccented parts of the measure, composers do not hesitate to 
 Mse thera so. 
 
 Although, in one sense of the word, appoggiaturas and passing notes arc 
 •nimportant, i. e., do not make an essential difference in th. character of a 
 piece, they impart all that is ornamental and grr.oeful to it. When they are 
 
|9f» APPOGGI.VTURAS AND PASSING NOTES. 
 
 freely used th-re is great danger of breaking the rules, especially t'lc rulei 
 against consecutive fifths, octaves, &c. As chords form, so to speak, the 
 solid framework of a' musical composition, and appoggiatuns and passing 
 notes the oiuamental work, it is highly importunt the student should hecome 
 skilful in usiu'^ them. It is therefore recommended that he shall carefully 
 work out the ftjllowing exercises, which are, in each instance, Practical Ex 
 ercise No 8, with one or more parts broken. 
 
 Rkm.vkk. It will be better for the student to use four staves in these ex- 
 ercises, placing the treble, alto, tenor and base each on a separate staff. 
 
 1st. Take Practical E.xercise No. 8, (page 88.) arrange it in dispersed 
 harmony, write the alto, tenor and base in half notes, and break the treble 
 into quarter not s, as in Example No. 1, on page 197. 
 
 In these exeni-es the broken part must be kept moving all the time, i. e., 
 a tone must not be struck twice in succession. In the first measure of ex- 
 ample No. 1, it will be seen that the treble moves to different members of the 
 two chords, and that that measure contains no passing notes, while in the 
 second measure the first and third notes do n )t belong in the chords, but are 
 appoggiaturas. Ob.serve that the unbroken parts are to be written just as 
 they "were in the student's dispersed harmony, except that th^y must be in 
 half instead of quarter notes Also observe that the tones in the broken part 
 must either belong to the -chord, or be an appoggiatura or passing note. 
 
 2d. Break the alto into quarter notes, as in Example No. 2. 
 
 3d. Break the tenor into quarter notes, as in Example No. 3. 
 
 4tli. Break the base into quarter notes, as in Example No. 4. 
 
 5th. Break the treble into eiglith notes, as in Example No. 5. 
 
 6th. Break the alto into eighth notes, as in Example No. 6. 
 
 7th. Break the tenor into eighth notes, as in Example No. 7. 
 
 8th. Break the base into eighth notes, as in Example No. 8. . 
 
 9th. Break the treble into sixteenth notes, as in Example No. 9. 
 
 10th. Break the alto into sixteenth notes, as in Example No. 10. 
 
 11th. Break the tenor into sixteenth notes, as in Example No. 11. 
 
 12th. Break the base into sixteenth notes, as in Example No. 12. 
 
 1.3th. lireak the treble into various short notes, as in Example No. 13. 
 
 14th. Break the alto into various short notes, as in Example No. 14. 
 
 1.5th. Break the tenor into various short notes, as in E.xample No. 15. 
 
 IGth. Break the ba.'^e into various short notes, as in Example No. 10. 
 
 17th. Break the treble into eighth notes and the tenor into quarter nut' s, as 
 in Example No. 17. 
 
 18th. Break the alto into eighth notes and the base into quarter notes, as is 
 Example No. 18. 
 
 19th. Break the treble into quarter notes and the tenor into sixteenth notea^ 
 »s in Example No. 19. 
 
APPOGGl LTURAS AND PASSING NOTES. 
 
 197 
 
 l20th. Break the alto into quarter notes and the base into sixteenth notes, at 
 A Example No. 20- 
 
 21st. Break all the parts into notes of various lengths, as in Example No. 21. 
 
 No. 1 
 
 111 ) t I I I 1 
 
 ^ — i*^ 
 
 "n — 
 
 :n_=n=: 
 
 r— p- 
 
 —1 r-^ ^— 
 
 f&c 
 
 :&c 
 
 No.S. 
 
 
 iiitgiiiii§iig|{ 
 
 &C 
 
 No. a 
 
 
 
 
 ! -^- 
 
 fs-— rz^T ,r-z:zEZi:c~ r — :-t— p — i i 
 
 &o 
 
 No. 4- 
 
 I 
 
 ^idzZZ-^r 
 
 :-j^z::^f: 
 
 s 
 
 ES^l^i 
 
 &c 
 
 W^ 
 
 -^- 
 
 ._^- 
 
 -^-i^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 £1--^: 
 
 _s^ 
 
 
 ri7»] 
 
198 
 
 APrOGGIATURAS AND PASSING NOTES. 
 
 No. 5 
 
 I 
 
 ^-^==g=F^::EE^ 
 
 '<S)- 
 
 ^1- 
 
 -nf r— T 
 
 3EE3-:3^ 
 
 =«Si=^&c 
 
 El' 
 
 No. G. 
 
 ,5==l?_=E|E:iEE:^EJEffEE3=.^i.e 
 
 pE:^:E:JE^=E:^§iEf--M.. 
 
 No. 7. 
 
 =-_-,b=.-4:=x:^=h==r==j^r4=z= 
 
 :r_25: 
 
 
 ::^=1 
 
 Es^i: 
 
 :^ — e1 
 
 
 :_p 1_ 
 
 No. 8. 
 
 
 ?z=:tz::E^EZ — czii — .sEL_-^r_ 
 
 &« 
 
 -J=^ 
 
 I 
 
 =Jg^^#&i^!I'" 
 
 & 
 
 - l-r-H— f-i-r-r 
 
APPOGGIATURAS AND PASSING NOTES. 
 
 .99 
 
 No. 9. 
 
 ^ fes, ^ j"^ i^g; fe^ F^ r— . 
 
 ^-i&c 
 
 ^=-==f^ 
 
 -- !g:_- 
 
 
 |e|||e5?||e^|eJ. 
 
 No 10. 
 
 
 *■ 
 
 No II. 
 
 -e: 
 
 ^. 
 
 THI^L 
 
 ^ 
 
 hcQ 
 
 ^57; Pr: ==a ra I'i^s^ =T?^ 05 
 
 =5|&c 
 
 No. 13. 
 
 ST 
 
 :S^: 
 
 :=z:=:S^z.zz__f 
 
 III 
 
 &L€ 
 
 &C 
 
BOD 
 
 APPOGGIATURAS AND PASSING NOTEt 
 
 No. 13. 
 
 
 ■S^g^^^f&« 
 
 tS- 
 
 —I T — S^S" 
 
 1 "S 
 
 
 ^ 1 
 
 T&c 
 
 No. 14. 
 
 I N 
 
 
 &c 
 
 -f=- 
 
 ^liiliiS 
 
 ^ ^^^ n^ T&e 
 
 — r 
 
 No. 15. 
 
 :^-:T— 
 
 
 ^-it: 
 
 a t — I *r 
 
 :|=t=l5C=— ^: 
 
 &e 
 
 -^ ^ r?i 1"^ ^ 
 
 ^--==p=r|z=:^.-:3:^$-g:z:z=vf^==|&e 
 
 No IC 
 
 ^ -si- 
 
 
 F&g 
 
 -«s- 
 
 I 
 
 =:rz^P 
 
 ^ 
 
 f^^^ 
 
APPOGGIATURAS AND PASSING NOTES. 
 
 201 
 
 No. 17. 
 
 •**. *^ r^ 1^ r-1 i^ ^ ^ 
 
 ;*7i"^:r!=-Ti=e=E?i7=i^i=a:-!E{&c 
 
 ee==e§p^3^Pe;=e^ 
 
 r&c 
 
 No. 18. 
 
 is: 
 
 (»---s 9-f-a-^ r- 
 
 
 — =t&c 
 
 -^- u '-^ u '^ '^1 r"^- -fj' 
 
 9' i 
 
 No. 19. 
 
 -=j£fe^EE^EEi^Ef&« 
 
 r .-^ -fs- 
 
 iiEEe=iEE£EEEl 
 
 ■P- 
 
 "F 
 
 No. ao. 
 
 ! I 1 , 
 
 1 3 r — 1 \- 
 
 I I II 
 
 f 
 
 ^ 
 
 (fcc 
 
 
202 
 
 UODULATION. 
 
 No. 31. 
 
 ;?s. 
 
 ■-^M 
 
 ••#•?. 
 ^ 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 5^ 
 
 
 :sSr 
 
 p 
 
 r:.r^_-<=-,c^-. .'_J 
 
 ^!^ 
 
 j^,-r 
 
 
 r*' "^ — i I J2J 
 
 iErtEFz^EE^EEEEEEEf"- 
 
 CHAPTER LVI. 
 
 MODULATIOPf. 
 
 The subject of Modulation was explained in Chapter XVIIT, rna 
 additional exj)lanations and remarks in reference to it have been 
 
MODULATION. 
 
 203 
 
 made in subsequent Chapters, so that the student can hardly be 
 otherwise than practically familiar with it. A few additional re 
 marks and exercises are added in this Chapter, although they cab 
 hardly be said to be necessary. 
 
 Keys which have the most letters in common, are said to bfl 
 nearest related. The keys of C and G have all but one letter in 
 common, the key of C having A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and the key 
 of G having A, B, C, D, E, F sharp, G. There is no F sharp in 
 the k"ey of C, and no F in the key of G, but all the other letters 
 are common to both keys, consequently these two keys are said to 
 be related to each other in the nearest possible manner. The 
 Keys of B and C, D and A, E and B, F and C, E|) and A [>, <fcc., &c., 
 sustain an equally near relation to each other. Modulations to a 
 key sustaining the nearest possible relation, is always the pleasant- 
 est. The more remote the key, the harsher will always be the 
 modulation. In common Church Tunes, Simple Glees, and easy 
 music of all kinds, it will be seen that modulations to the nearest 
 key are almost exclusively employed. Thus, a tune in the key 
 of C, almost invariably modulates to the key of G or the key of F, 
 and seldom to a more remote key. 
 
 Keys which have all letters but one in common, (i. e. differ but 
 one sharp or flat in the signature,) are said to be one degree 
 removed from each other. Keys which differ two sharps or flats 
 in the signature, are said to be two degrees removed from each 
 other. Keys which differ three, four, five, six, seven, &c., sharps 
 or flats in the signature, are said to be three, four, Jive, six, seven, &c., 
 degrees removed from each other. 
 
 The chord most commonly employed for the purpose of modu- 
 lation is V, or V7, but any chord can be employed with equal 
 propriety. 
 
 By means of V, or V7, modulate from the key of C, to all the other keys, 
 (viz : Db, 1), Eb, E, Y^, G, Ab, A, B[). B.) 
 From C to D. 
 
 Modulation from C to D^- 
 
 :5bfizbS5| 
 
 From C to Efj. 
 
 1^3: 
 
 (fee 
 
 V7 
 
 Modulate from the key of A Minor to all the Minor keys, by means of V, of 
 
804 
 
 MODULATION. 
 
 The chord next most commonly used in modulations, is the 
 double diminished chord of the seventh. Exercises in modulation 
 by means of this chord are given on page 132. 
 
 It will be well for the student to write exercises, modulating from the keys 
 of C major and A minor to every other key, in every possible manner, employ- 
 ing every possible chord. 
 
 When modulations arc made to keys only one or two degrees 
 distant, the modulation can scarcely be harsh whatever chords are 
 used, but when the transition is to more remote keys, the harshness 
 of the modulation is modified in proportion to the number of tones 
 in the modulating chord which belong in both keys. See page 131. 
 
 It will be a good exercise to examine all the chords enharmonically, (See 
 page 134,) and find which belong in more than one key. 
 
 
 In the above example the common chord of I in the major key is examined 
 enharmonically. The three tones composing it, are expressed in thirteen differ- 
 ent ways. If in either of the ways, the three letters composing the chord 
 belon" in one key, that example will be useful for modulation. Those in which the 
 three letters do not belong in the same key, are useless. In the seventh c hord 
 the three letters as there expressed belong in the key of C# minor, constit (tint; 
 b that key, the chord of the eleventh of VII:|f4. 
 
 Key of C# Minor. 
 
 Key of A Minor. 
 
 -^fft 
 
 vn#4. 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 3^: 
 
 IV I Vll#4j, V 
 
CONCLUDING REMARKS. 205 
 
 In the above examples the chord of the eleventh of VII with gharp four 
 is represented complete in the key of (Ji^ minor,' and also in the key of A mi- 
 nor. An example of a modulation by means of the chord of I enbarmonicall} 
 changed to Vll^hi is also given. The chords of II, III, IV, V, VI and VIl 
 in major, and I, II, II=ff4, III, IV, #IV, V, VI and VII in minor, can be en- 
 harmouically examined in the same way, as aLo all the chords of the seventh, ninth, 
 eleventh, &c. Practical Exercise No. 31, (page 159,) in passing from the twelfth 
 measure to the thirteenth, jumps from the key of G, to the key of E{), without 
 any modulation whatever. A perfect close is made in the twelfth measure, and 
 the thirteenth is considered as commencing a different strain, having no harn)onio 
 connection with anything before it. 
 
 CHAPTER LVII. 
 
 CONCLUDING REMARKS. 
 
 Cadences. Perfect, imperfect, and mock cadences are explained on 
 page 143. The common chord of IV followed by the common chord 
 of I, is said to form a Plagal Cadence. Practical Exercise 
 No. 21, closes with a plagal cadence. Some anthers do not approve 
 of the nse of plagal cadences, bnt most composers occasionally 
 employ them, especially in Sacred music. 
 
 Perfect cadence. Imperfect cadence. Plagal cadence. 
 
 t 
 
 VI I V IV V 
 
 Strict Style. Free Style. Compositions in which a certain 
 number of parts are preserved throughout, are said to be in strict 
 STYLE. Compositions in which the parts are unequal, are said to 
 be in free style. A psalm tune is a composition in strict style, 
 because it consists of four regtilar parts throughout. A Piano-Forte 
 fantasia (and in fact most piano-forte compositions.) is a composition 
 in free style, because no regularity in the number of parts is ob- 
 served. The rules of harmony apply strictly only to compositions 
 in strict style. In free style, the general character of the compo- 
 sition must be in accordance Avith the rules, but as in that style on« 
 chord may consist of three letters, and the next chord to it, of seven 
 the same exactness that is required in strict style canrotbe obse veA 
 [18] 
 
206 CONCLUDING RKMARKS. 
 
 Pedal Notes. On page 15S, the upper parts in the second chord of 
 thcnrst example in Chapter XLV. are described as pedal notes. Perhaps the 
 chord may more properly be called the chord of the seventh, ninth and eleventh, 
 (see page 191,) in which case the Treble, Alto and Tenor are the discords, and 
 BS such, are properly prepared and resolved. 
 
 Chords of tiik Eleventh. In the example of " chords of the eleventh as 
 usually used," on page 183, the chord of ^IVn is accidentally omitted. 
 
 Cadences. The sequences in cadences are introduced solely for the purpose 
 of exercise with the various discords. They are of no practical utility in composition 
 
 Examination of Music. As directed on page 106, at all stages of his stud- 
 ies, the student should examine compositions of different authors, and notice 
 particularly whether the rules of harmony are observed, and also the peculiari- 
 ties in each composer's method of using the different chords. 
 
 Violations of Rules. In the examination of various compositions, the 
 student will undoubtedly find numerous violations of the rule?, even in works 
 of composers of undoubted merit. In all such cases he must endeavor to decide 
 whether a rule is broken designedly, and if designedly, whether the composer is 
 justified in varying from the rule. The rules of harmony are deduced from the 
 compositions of classical composers. These composers never used consecutive 
 fifths, and so consecutive fifths are forbidden. So with the other rules. If a 
 composer is convinced that in a particular passage, a violation of a rule will pro- 
 duce a good effect, he will not usually hesitate to violate it ; but it may be 
 doubted whether any of the fundamental rules can be violated with good effect. 
 
 Consecutive Fifths. It does not require a refined ear, to detect the un- 
 pleasant effect produced by two parts moving in consecutive fifths. Some, hold 
 that when two tones forming perfect fifths are struck, the tone which is a 
 major third from the lowest tone vibrates from sympathy, and is consequently 
 heard at the same time with tho.«e forming the fifth, and that the unpleasant 
 effect is only produced when this " invisible" mnjor third is out of the key. 
 
 :#5=i:-»::=«::± 
 
 If ttic first three of the above chords, are played, one after tlie other, the 
 effect will be very unpleasant, occasioned, according to th's theory, by the 
 first being in the key of C, the second in the key of D, and the third in the key 
 of E. In the last measure, the two chords are both in the key of C, and it will 
 be noticed that tlie effect of that consecutive fifth is much le.ss unplea.sant than 
 in the first measure. Some good composers hold that consecutive fifths, are un- 
 objectionable, when introduced in such a manner that the presence of a major thin! 
 in them will not j)roducc another key, as in the second measure of the above 
 example. 
 
 Consecutive Octaves and Primes. If a composition has four regular 
 parts, the listener hears the progression of four parts, at the performance of each 
 chord. If, in such a piece, consecutive octaves or primes are introduced, the 
 effect upon the listener, is as if one part had been destroyed, and another doubled 
 in power. For example, if the ptuls are equally balanced, upon the introduction 
 
SUBSEQUENT STUDIES. 
 
 207 
 
 if octaves or primes, one part disappears, and another is heard of double Ine 
 fower required to preserve the proper balance. This is the sole objection to 
 octaves and primes. Of course they are of no consequence in free style, and in 
 Etriet style, where composers are not particular about a nice balance of parts, 
 tbey are sometimes employed. 
 
 Musical Composition. Writing a piece of music, resembles writing a 
 story. As a story may be written without a blemish in its grammatical con- 
 struction, and yet be a flat and insipid story, so a musical composition may be 
 faultless, as far as the rules of harmony are concerned, and yet be an uninterest- 
 ing and meaningless composition. As interesting and meritorious tales are 
 frequently written by those who have not the rules of grammar at command, 
 so interesting and meritorious musical compositions are often written by those 
 who are ignorant of the rules of harmony. It is only, however, when inventive 
 powers and harmonic knowledge are combined, that compositions interesting 
 and grammatically correct can be written. 
 
 END OF TREATISE ON HARMONY. 
 
 CHAPTER LVIII. 
 
 SUBSEQUENT STUDIES. 
 
 The student who has faithfully studied this work, is now familiar with all the 
 chords, and the rules which govern the progression of the tones which compose 
 the chords. If he has followed the directions literally he has already composed 
 tunes himself, and perhaps finds no diflBculty in writing simple psalm tunes, 
 glees, or instrumental compositions. Were he to attempt the composition of an 
 oratorio or symphony, he would probably find that the materials which a knowl- 
 edge of the chords afford him, are not sufficient to produce all the effects he 
 would desire. Perhaps most students who have made themselves masters of 
 harmony, when first attempting composition, feel inclined to ask themselves 
 "how shall I make the different parts move in order to make a good tune ?" 
 Although the answer to this question, is "just as you please, provided you break 
 no rule/' it has been found better to classify the various progressions that can 
 be made, when of course, the composer who is familiar with every variety of 
 progression, will have a resource to draw from, where his own imagination fails- 
 The theory of music may properly be arranged under seven different heads. 
 
 1st Elementary Principles. 2d. Thorough Base. 3d. Harmony. 
 4th. Counterpoint. 5th. Fuge. 6th. Canon. 7th. Form. 
 
 The First, (Elementary principles,) must of course be studied preparatory 
 I) learning to sing, or learning to play upon any musical instrument. 
 
 The Second, (Thorough Base,) teaches such a knowledge of chords as is nece* 
 "tiry, in order to play by chords upon the piano-forte. One who is familial 
 iFith Thoroutrh Base, will be able to tell the name of every chord, and will be 
 
208 
 
 SUBSEQUENT STUDIES. 
 
 able to play four part compositions upon the piano, organ, &.C., reading fom 
 parts at once by chords, but will know nothinn; of the manner in which 
 chords must be treated in order to make good sounding tunes. In other words, 
 Thorough liasc, teaches its student to read and play chords which others have 
 written, but not to compose them himself. Persons who wish to be able to 
 play psalm tunes, glees and such pieces, in which it is necessary to read four 
 parts at once, (which can only be done by such a classification of the tones into 
 chords, as to require but one operation of the mind to read four parts,) but who 
 do not wish to compose tunes, voluntaries or interludes, need no further knowl- 
 edge of chords than is taught in Thorough Base. 
 
 The Thiud, (Harmony,) teaches such a knowledge of chords as will enable 
 the student to compose music. 
 
 Tue Fourth, (Counterpoint,) teaches the classification of the various pro- 
 gressions which can be made with the different parts. For example, Contra- 
 punr.tiis aequalis or equal counterpoint, in which the notes in each part are of 
 equal length ; Contrapunctus inaequalis, or unequal counterpoint, in which 
 the notes of the different parts are of unequal length ; Conlrapunclus diminu- 
 tus, in which there are several notes in one part against one in the other; 
 Contrapunto alia diritta, in which ono of the parts moves, throughout, 
 ascending or descending in the order of the scale; Contrapunto di Salto ; 
 Contrapunto in Sultarello, &cq., &c. 
 
 Contrapun 2tus aequalis. 
 
 Contrapunctus inaequalis. 
 
 '^ 
 
 gEgj^g^gi l 
 
 iiiSi^ 
 
 -^*-,;^>-,.^-^.«r"f-^-f2- 
 
 m m^^m^m 
 
 Contrapunctus diminutus. 
 
 mmi 
 
 
 Contrapunto alia dirltta. 
 
 ^z 
 
 tzftztEEdi:! 
 
 1=? 
 
 
 1=f 
 
 A part of the terras applied to the different kinds of counterpoint, are Latin, 
 and a part Italian. The foregoing examples are in what is termed, " Single 
 Counterpoint." The following example is a specimen of one species of " Double 
 Counterpoint," called "The Octave." There are numerous other varieties. 
 In this, it will be seen that one part is repeated an " octovo'' higher, while the 
 >ther remains at the same pitch. 
 
SUBSEQUENT STUDIES. 
 
 209 
 
 The Fifth, (Fuge,) teaches a style of composition in which a theme, com- 
 menced in one part alone, and repeated at the commencement of each other 
 part, is the ground work. For want of space to explain even one of the numer- 
 ous varieties of fuges, the following commencement of one of Bach's fuges is 
 given as an illustration of this style of composition. It will be seen that the 
 theme is expressed by the first six notes, and that it is repeated at the com- 
 mencement of the tenor, a fifth higher, at the commencement of the alto an 
 octave higher, and at the commencement of the treble, a twelfth higher than 
 it is where it commences in the base. 
 
 &c. 
 
 ):zi— :r:i;;zzi^izd:5riEii-i=^«'=l?=i-:^= 
 
 [^#T:»00=^=^initf=:*??=:B^-zz:Ti:]:z=:zzi:=::zz:i 
 
210 SUBSEQUENT STUDIES. 
 
 The Sixth, (Canon,) teaclies a style of composition, in which the parts commence 
 one after the other as in a fuge, and in which the notes in each part are exactly 
 alike, and the tones bears exactly the same relation to each other, from the first to the 
 last In the following example, it will be seen that the half notes, quarter notes, and 
 eighth notes in the treble, occur in exactly the same order that they do in the base ; 
 and tliat the treble has the same theme which is contained in the base, only an octave 
 higher. There are many varieties of Canon. In some the themes are a seventh, a 
 sixth, &c., apart. In others, one part contains the theme " augmented," i. e., with 
 the notes twice as long in one part as in the other, &c., &c. 
 
 lS3^!^i^^|^|%|J^^ 
 
 :^±:i*«. 
 
 The Seventh, (Form,) teaches the order in which the different musical ideas 
 which form a musical composition will produce the most pleasing effect. Little or no 
 attention is paid to " Form" in vocal music, but classical writers have usually arranged 
 lone instrumental compositions under one or more of the following forms, viz : " Alle- 
 gro Form," Minuetto Form," " Variation Form," and " Rondo Form." A brief 
 description of Allegro Form, will convey an idea of what is meant by this department 
 
 A piece arranged in Allegro Form, must be in two parts. The first part must have 
 Ist, a Theme ; 2d, a preparation ; 3d, another theme on the dominant, (i. e, in a key 
 a fifth distant from the key of the first theme,) called the " Middle Sentence ;" 4th, a 
 passage called a " cadence," with which the first part may close, or there may be 
 added, 5th, small cadences called " Codas." The second part must have, 1st, a Theme, 
 either like the theme at the commencement of the first part, or entirely different ; 
 2d, a preparation ; 3d, a long phrase called a " Fantasie," in which the composer has 
 full liberty to introduce difficult modulations, &c., &c, ; 4th, the first theme of the 
 first j)art again ; 5th, the " Middle Sentence" in the tonic (i. e. the theme which is 
 called the " Middle Sentence" in the first part, and which is there on the Dominant, 
 must here be repeated in the key of the first theme of the first part,) 6th, cadence. 
 
 To give the student an idea of the seven departments into wliich the theory of 
 music is divided, the following works are mentioned. " Boston Academy of Music's 
 Manual," contains 252 pages, and treats exclusively of the Elementary Principles. 
 •'Johnson's Instructions in Thorough Base," contains 120 pages, and treats exclusively 
 of Thorough Base. " Johnson's Instructions in Harmony," contiiins 210 pages, and 
 treats exclusively of Harmony." " Andre's Lehre des Contrapunkte," contains 286 
 pages, and treats exclasively of Counterpoint. " Andre's Lehre dcr Fuge," contains 
 340 pages, and treats exclusively of Fuges. " Andre'« Lehre d.'s Canons,"contains 828 
 pages, and treats exclusively of Canons. No separate volume upon " Form" has e" «r 
 l^ien published 
 
INDEX. 
 
 Occidentals 5i 
 
 A-nalyzing music, .... 106, 178, 206 
 
 Appogiaturas, 196 
 
 Avoided cadences, 145 
 
 Avoided deceiving cadences, .... 149 
 
 Best positions, 33 
 
 Cadences, U3, 206 
 
 Cadences, avoided, ........ 145 
 
 Cadences, deceiving, ........ 149 
 
 Cadences, imperfect, 143 
 
 Cadences, mock 143 
 
 Cadences, perfect 143 
 
 Cadences, plagal 205 
 
 Cadences, suspended 158 
 
 Canons, 210 
 
 Chief chords of the seventh, 108 
 
 Chord of I., third form 48 
 
 Chords of the seventh, . . . 7,106,173 
 
 Cliords of the ninth, 12,178 
 
 Chords of the eleventh 13,181 
 
 Chords of the thirteenth, 184 
 
 Chords of the seventh and ninth, . 14, 186 
 Chords of the seventh and eleventh, 15, 189 
 Chords of the ninth and eleventh, . 15, 190 
 Chords of the seventh, ninth and 
 
 eleventh 15,191 
 
 Chords of the seventh, ninth, eleventh 
 
 and thirteenth, 193 
 
 Chords, recapitulation, . . . 99, 173, 185 
 
 Close harmony, 31 
 
 Common chords, . . . . 5, 10, 21, 56, 99 
 
 Common chords, major, 21, 56 
 
 Common chords, minor, 21, 56 
 
 Common chords, diminished, 22, 44, 56, 62 
 Common chords, superfluous, . . .66, 71 
 Common chords, double diminished, . . 84 
 Common chords, major diminished, . . 97 
 Common chords, recapitulatic^, ... 99 
 Common chords o''"'yid VI, 77 
 
 CompositioD, ........... 207 
 
 Concords, 44 
 
 Consecutive fifths, .... 29, 51, 7. , 206 
 
 Consecutive octaves 34 
 
 Consecutive primes 42 
 
 Contrary motion, 29 
 
 Counterpoint, , 208 
 
 Deceiving cadences, 147 
 
 Diminished common chords, . 22, 44, 5S, G2 
 
 Diminished fifths 17, 45 
 
 Diminished chords of the seventh, . . 136 ' 
 
 Discords, 14, 44, 77, 198 
 
 Dispersed Harmony, 39 
 
 Dominant 109 
 
 Double diminished common chords, . . 84 
 Double diminished chords of the seventh, 125 
 
 Double sharps, 56 
 
 Double flats, 55 
 
 Elementary principles, 207 
 
 Elevenths 18, 181 
 
 Elevenths and sevenths, 15, 189 
 
 Elevenths and ninths 15, 190 
 
 Fifths, perfect, 29, 51, 71 
 
 Fifths, diminished, 17, 45 
 
 Fifths, superfluous 66, 71 
 
 Fifths, consecutive, . . .29,51,71,206 
 
 Fifths, hidden 60 
 
 Figure of a sequence, 76 
 
 Figures, original use of, 11 
 
 Figured base, 5 
 
 Fixed resolutions, 64 
 
 Flats, .10,54 
 
 Flats, double, 55 
 
 Flats, triple, 55 
 
 Form 210 
 
 Forms, 26,49,180 
 
 Free tones, . C4 
 
 Free style, 20i 
 
 Fuge, . . 2t>9 
 
Fundamental note, 5 
 
 Given melody 70 
 
 Harmony, 208 
 
 Harmony, close, 81 
 
 Harmony, dispcreed, 39 
 
 Hidden fifths and octarca 60 
 
 Imperfect cadence, 143 
 
 Intervals, 16. 51 
 
 Leading note, 42 
 
 Major diminished common chord, . . 96 
 Major diminished chord of the seventh, 164 
 
 Major key, 57 
 
 Major mode, <^7 
 
 Major scale, IS, 105 
 
 Mediant 109 
 
 Minor key, 56, 57 
 
 Minor mode, 57 
 
 Minor scale, 51 , 105 
 
 Mook cadences, i'i3 
 
 Modes 57 
 
 Motion, 29 
 
 Modulition, ... 36, 105, 132, 177, 202 
 
 Musical composition, 207 
 
 Naturals 10, 55 
 
 Ninths 12, 178 
 
 Ninths and sevenths, 14, 186 
 
 Ninths and elevenths, 15, 190 
 
 Oblique motion, 29 
 
 Octaves, 84 
 
 One chord sequences 79 
 
 Original use of figures, 11 
 
 Own melody, 70 
 
 Passing notes 151, 191 
 
 r«dal notes 155 
 
 Perfe;rt cadence, 148 
 
 Perfect fifths 29, 51, 71 
 
 Plagal cadence, 205 
 
 Positions, 84 
 
 Practical exercises, 67 
 
 Preparation, 44, 71, 188 
 
 Primes, 42 
 
 Progression 28 
 
 Recapitulation of common chords, . . 99 
 Recapitulation of chords of the seventh, 173 
 
 Recapitulation of chtards, . . . . . 18& 
 
 Recapitulation of discords, 198 
 
 Resolution 41 62, 71 
 
 Rule I. 29 
 
 Rule II., 34 
 
 Rule III '. 42 
 
 Rule IV., 43 
 
 Rule v., 45 
 
 Rule VI., 4& 
 
 Rule VII., 50 
 
 Rule VIII., 60 
 
 Sc.ile, major, 18 
 
 Scale, minor, 51 
 
 Second forms, . 4'.) 
 
 Sequences, 7i> 
 
 Sequences in cadences, 143, 20& 
 
 Sequences in avoided cadences, ... .145 
 Sequences in deceiving cadences, . . . 147 
 Sequences in avoided deceiviBgcadetces,149 
 
 Sevenths, 7, 106, 17;* 
 
 Sevenths and ninths, 14, 18G 
 
 Sevenths and elevenths, .... 15, 18'.? 
 Sevenths, ninths and elevenths, 15, lUl 
 
 Sevenths, recapitulation, 173 
 
 Sharps 10, 54 
 
 Sharps, double, bo 
 
 Sharps, triple, b'^ 
 
 Sharp four, 84, 96, 177 
 
 Signature, 19 
 
 Similar motion, 2'j 
 
 Strict style, 20."; 
 
 Superfluous common chords, . . . 56, 71 
 
 Superfluous fifths, 51, 56, 71 
 
 Suspended cadences, 158 
 
 Theory of chords, ...... .185,193 
 
 Third forms 49 
 
 Thirteenths, 185 
 
 Thorough base, 5, 207, 210 
 
 Tonic, 109 
 
 Triple diminished chords of the seventh, 160 
 
 Triple flats 56 
 
 Triple sharps, 55 
 
 Unisons, 42 
 
 Violation of rulo^ 206 
 
CD3521bbD5 
 
 / ^;^.0't?" 
 
DATE DUE 
 
 Music Library 
 
 University of California at 
 Berkeley 
 

 -^ . - pubiistied uy Ditscn &l Lo-., [Jui,Lon & N. Y. 
 
 N'T, Vv -I'l'AGJ; PAID. OS UECEIPT OK I'RICE. ' 
 
 r.i',,-„lf,,rflicri!.nr.. 
 
 ■ii.li i'ligcrliig $4 OO 
 
 N'-'iina Auiurican 
 
 '■"itj 3 75 'i\. 
 
 - -..<... CoiTiplute, $3 00, 
 
 ' V. 2 50 IV: 
 
 o)lMrstMi;>=k--Book 75 - 
 
 Mithod. Ootnplcte, S2 50. K, 
 
 ' 2 00 
 
 OM- F hool for tlie Piano- 'U" 
 
 ••• 75 
 
 I V-rfect G -lido r.rthe IMaDo- 
 
 , '- Piano Priiner. Cloth , 45 cts ; 
 
 >''::::kr'aCat':'C>i;^in ..........'..'. 
 
 Fv- Tliounand Musical Torins 
 
 H. •• Circle. T^oirle 
 
 ri..ist'9AJbii.n " ; ■■ 
 
 l'..in-,)-f..rU!<itij J" .. 
 0;>.r.iBou£Ie 
 8U!i<1.i.-d Opcrjj?. 
 TbeTiinf-'sfJ<;!.i( 
 
 Hi I ,■;• 
 
 ice Music for 18 in- 
 
 ■Vos. K;.nh 
 
 '■u. 30MclodicB,ft)r5 
 
 -. Each 
 
 •hool for Accordoon, 
 -v.. lot, nud Kife. Each 
 ■ ^t Guide for Gernifm 
 
 Wi:ih.. 
 
 Concjit 
 Buclvltry '» Biinjo G uidc. ...... . . . . .... . 7S 
 
 2 00 DulciniLT Instrnctor. 60 
 
 Anny Drum and Fife Book.. 75 
 
 ao Draper "t^ Fife Melodies 60 
 
 38 . Uas.-iiniVs ..rt of Sin-iin?. Oomnlete,. ^•>i 
 T,-. I $4 0'J. Ai.rldged, »;» 00.' Toior VoI-mJ f 00 
 2 yO I Mason's (Dr. Lowell) I.nrce Mii-ic 
 
 Ea 
 
 Hcn.,ol fjc t)m Orjjr.n Ly Zun- 
 "rjfua aciiooi. is'oiv- Edition. 
 
 4 00 
 
 charts. 2 Series. (Cantioibe.sci'i-by 
 iii.-iil.) Erieli 8 ,y 
 
 Panaeion's A B O. ."64 00. Abridged. 1 o 
 
 Btandaid Siiiging^Sdiool. L. H. Sojtciu- 
 ard ;■..,. 3 ,j,y 
 
 Wilhelm'a Method. Adapfcd to School- 
 room. By llullah. . . . . .j; t\- 
 
 Amphion. Part-Songs, for Male Voices, 
 in separaU' hobkd, with Pia»io accom- 
 paniment. ...- 5 00 
 
 Avion. Part-Pongs, for Male Voi««, jii 
 separate books, with Piano accotnpa- 
 nimeut 4 00 
 
 ,.' ■'!'''■;■'■, 6 00 
 
 .V>'-!''"~' ' ''"■""!"■•■ 2 vols Each, Ms 3 00 
 ^:' ' ■ '•'■■•■"■u.^ ...,,1 ]. •,-i.idtn. Zundcl 2 00 
 ':, -li • iiecl Orgaua 2 50 
 
 ' ■' • hisrm-ior 1 60 
 
 S .'• Or. .ir.et i">rgai .. 2 50 j Chorus "Wreath. Saered and 'Secular." ! i o« 
 
 5' ':;;"'■'■<;>"'■"'. ">r.et().'?.in. Cl'h 2 00 I Fcstval Glee-Book. By Koot & Brad- 
 
 /■: I ill s M.,iodcon Ii-stnicl >• 2 50 | burv.. •> ,,i> 
 
 C.ii-.igvi.s'.,MttiiodfcrihoGuitar,i.:;00; Oentlomen's Gleo-iiook. 'ja- dV.LowI " 
 
 A^-,.Ijjed_ _.. 200 dlMason ... 1 ,>) 
 
 I yjeiiH^, warn. Impro- I'd Method I Grectinsr. L. O. Emer«on ' i 38 
 
 - ' !''<-("iii" ■ 3 00 j ^iew-Ynrk Glee- and Choru.'i Book. " 
 
 h. ol , )r tli- I .ii.ur. . 75 Br:idt>nvv 2 00 
 
 iin ..r iliod. Cc -.pleto 6 00 | Yot - A-- ?:'. -•■:-; ,(j-Bor.t. . Root and 
 
 i-'.-iiS-wi 
 
 ' }^fn' 
 
 n VioHn ii- 
 
 ■ ■• 3 00 Ci- . 
 
 1 ' .-'he VioUn. FePBon- t'!- 
 
 • 2 M . M'-i- ^. 
 
 : "I for^hc Violin .. 7;'. ^--tOO; 
 • forth.jF 'ire 3 uo 1 \Vr<:...> 
 
 yv 
 
 '1 forth.: 
 MusicforthoF;utet 
 
 Dances f'jr Violia and pin.i 
 
 $4 m ; 1 
 
 Kaeh. , 
 -l,Du. 
 
 .... 1 ''- 
 I. ^' V>!Ug('Sonjfs.) 
 
 rlolh 2 'J. 
 
 ■. <'<nt,. Kl't, 
 
 (^V'-K,'giiV, "/ 
 
 ti, and 100 jcoloh 
 Shower of P"nri», 
 
 .;■■.■•.■ end Piano DucU. Pr ^V 
 \.',.in and Piano Dui-.s. By \' 
 
 IW il.Miuif,,! M-lodiesfor :'.e. v 
 
 lO't ■'>;.cniti(; .\ n-a for fb" Kujc 
 
 i; .r.-.',-i-«'« Vlolonclk. 
 
 -V:.ri,'«id 
 
 Fri-ii. .■■,:■.'-! In^rrn,- 
 
 ■T f.-, 
 
 Com. !.«50; 
 
 a 2- 
 
 Dou'. io B.aha 3 o 
 
 1^1' -lo, Con.o- 
 
 ,,J 'irn. F.Hch f 
 
 '^ : ; '.. Foriidl 
 
 l):iiijl. 'it (lit!-ren; Airs, on Card*. 
 
 P I'.;!) Number 1 i , 
 
 Qu.xitct Orchwttra. Otmplete......... e